OPERA T

ADJUSTMENT MANUAL

OPERA T - ADJUSTMENT MANUAL CODE 41309 - REVISION 15

 BLANK PAGE

OPERA T - ADJUSTMENT MANUAL CODE 41309 - REVISION 15

 OPERA T
Universal Remote-controlled Table

Adjustment Manual

Section 0: General Index rev. 15 November 2019

This manual is valid for all versions of the remote-controlled table

General Medical Merate Document authorized by

Via Partigiani , 25 Quality Management
Seriate (Bg) – Italy
Tel. (0039) 035 4525311
Fax. (0039) 035 297787
Blank page
 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

Section 0: General Index rev. 15 November 2019

Sect.No. Section Title Pages Rev. Rev. date.

0 General Index 14 15 11/2019
1 Setup procedure 12 14 11/2019
2 Error codes 2 6 11/2019
3 Equipment configuration 1 13 11/2019
3.1 Password 2 0 06/2007
3.2 Filing the default data in Eeprom 1 0 03/1998
3.3 Equipment configuration 8 7 11/2015
3.4 X-ray room configuration 7 5 11/2015
3.5 I.I. configuration 3 5 11/2015
3.6 Cassette configuration 1 1 06/2007
3.7 SFD configuration 2 2 11/2015
3.8 Collimator configuration 1 3 07/2008
3.9 Tabletop configuration 2 5 11/2015
3.10 DFR and SFD selection configuration 1 2 06/2007
3.11 I.I. ascent-descent movements configuration 1 1 06/2007
3.12 Integrated generator configuration 1 6 11/2015
3.13 Pulsed fluoroscopy configuration 1 1 06/2007
3.14 Angio modality configuration 1 1 06/2007
3.15 D2000 and D4000 digital system configuration 1 3 11/2015
3.16 Mobile Area speed configuration 1 1 06/2007
3.17 Fixed/variable focal distance configuration 1 3 11/2015
3.18 P48 push-button function configuration 1 1 06/2007
3.19 P29 push-button function configuration 1 1 06/2007
3.20 Longitudinal Tabletop transmission configuration 1 1 06/2007
3.21 Grid configuration 2 3 11/2015
3.22 Semiautomatic in SGF configuration 1 1 06/2007
3.23 Periscanning configuration 1 2 11/2015
3.24 Wallstand configuration 1 1 06/2007
3.25 Longitudinal tabletop configuration step by step 1 0 07/2008
3.26 Tomographic mode configuration 5 2 11/2015
3.27 Configuration of exposure delay for WiFi detectors 1 0 11/2015
3.28 Virtual scanning configuration 1 0 11/2019
4 Adjustments 1 7 11/2015
4.1 Keyboard knob adjustment 1 0 03/1998
4.2 Tilting adjustment 18 5 06/2007
4.3 Tilting group elevation 14 3 06/2007
4.4 Stand adjustment 16 5 11/2015
4.5 SFD adjustment 14 6 11/2015
4.6 Preliminary tomographic controls 10 4 11/2019
4.7 Tomographic controls 6 2 11/2019
4.8 Longitudinal tabletop 8 6 11/2015
4.9 Focal distance 10 4 11/2015
4.10 Collimator 16 3 07/2008
4.11 Cassette dimensions 6 3 06/2007

Section 0: General Index rev. 15 November 2019 – page3/12

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

4.12 Transversal Tabletop 6 1 11/2019

4.13 Compressor 10 1 11/2004
4.14 Parallel diaphragms 8 2 11/2015
4.15 Crossed-diaphragms 8 2 11/2015
4.16 Grid 14 2 11/2015
4.17 Longitudinal cassette-holder 10 3 11/2015
4.18 Transversal cassette-holder 10 3 11/2015
4.19 I.I. 8 4 11/2015
4.20 Tube centering 6 2 01/2004
4.21 Block from the suspension accessory 2 0 03/1998
4.22 Display adjustment on the stand 4 1 06/2007
4.23 Focal distance adjustment compensation 2 0 11/2004
5 Configurations 1 7 11/2015
5.1 25S1 (CPU Host) configuration jumper 1 1 01/2004
5.2 25S2 (Assis board) configuration jumper 1 1 01/2004
5.3 25S3-Sw2 (I/O board) dip-switches 1 2 07/2008
5.4 25S3-Sw1 (I/O board) dip-switches 1 0 06/2000
5.5 25S3-jumper for board configuration (I/O board) 1 0 04/2005
5.6 25S4-jumper configuration (injector interface board) 0 0 04/2005
5.7 Visualization parameters console display 1S3 2 2 11/2015
6 Software management 3 3 01/2004
6.1 25S1 firmware updating 1 1 01/2004
6.2 25S2 firmware updating 1 2 01/2004
6.3 1S2 firmware updating 1 2 01/2004
6.4 25S1 checksum control 0 1 01/2004
6.5 1S2 checksum control 1 1 01/2004
6.6 Alarms reset 0 2 01/2004
6.7 Date modification 1 1 01/2004
6.8 Microprocessor’s boards testing 0 1 01/2004
7 Chains and belts adjustment 10 0 06/2000
Total pages: 314


Each Section is preceded by its index including the information on the last
revision.

Section 0: General Index rev. 15 November 2019 – page4/12

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1. General Notes ............................................................................................................................... 5

1.1 Typographic conventions ..................................................................................................... 6

1. General Notes

WARNING

X-RAY EQUIPMENTS CAN BE DANGEROUS TO THE HEALTH OF BOTH PATIENTS AND OPERATORS UNLESS
PROPER SAFETY MEASURES ARE STRICTLY OBSERVED.
Although this equipment was designed and manufactured according to the most up-to-date safety
Standards, the X-ray beam always represents a danger, should not the operator be properly qualified
and trained. Excessive exposures to X-rays cause damages to the human body: therefore, all the
necessary precautions must be taken to prevent unauthorised or unskilled personnel from operating
this equipment, thus jeopardising themselves and other people.
Before executing any operations, the personnel being authorised and qualified for using this
equipment, must be informed on the protection measures established by the International
Committee for Radiological protection, as well as other relevant national Standards.

Note: This equipment is in compliance with the requirements established by the 89/336/CEE
Directive applying to the Electromagnetic Compatibility.
In order to comply with such requirements, special technical measures were adopted (such as the
application of anti-noise filters and/or ferrites on some circuits) and precise earthing connections
were defined. The metallic covers and their clamps are realised and checked by means of fixing
devices or special conductive material-gaskets ensuring both the immunity to external sources of
disturbance and the limitation of possible internal disturbances generated by the electrical circuits.
Therefore, it is recommended that the technicians executing possible maintenance or fixing
interventions, should not modify the path of the connections and carefully reconnect all
earthing connectors of the gaskets (should these be removed during the maintenance or fault
research operations) and restore the protection gaskets with the utmost attention in the same
conditions and with the same fixing devices originally foreseen.

Note: The original document was drawn up in Italian.

GENERAL MEDICAL MERATE S.p.A. shall decline all responsibility with regard to the
good functioning of the equipment should the installation and/or the maintenance of if be
executed by unauthorised personnel.

Section 0: General Index rev. 15 November 2019 – page5/12

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.1 Typographic conventions

In order to facilitate the reading of the manual, different styles and types were used: please make
reference to the following:

Text identified by one bullet:

Example:
• Instructions to be executed according to the sequence specified.

Text in italics accompanied by the symbol “i” (information):

Example:


Important information

Text in italics included within a frame:

Example:

Useful supplementary information

1.2 Symbols of advice positioned on the equipment:

Warning symbol to advise when a possible general danger for the
equipment or the operator may occur.
Invite the operator to check the equipment documentations

Hazard symbol to advise X-ray radiation exposition

Warning symbol to advise for electrical components that are sensitive

to electrostatic discharge

Warning symbol to advise of live electrical parts with a possible risk of

electric shock

Warning symbol to advise of possible fingers squashing

Section 0: General Index rev. 15 November 2019 – page6/12

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

2. Opera T equipment types

The following tables show the OPERA T series composition.

Each equipment requires proper configuration, adjustments, calibrations, installation and interfaces. The table composition depends on the
type, the position and combination with other devices/accessories.

O-T20s

O-T20sx

O-T20d

O-T90s

O-T90sx

O-T90d

O-T90e

O-T90ex

O-T90ed

Meratel-I
TYPE

COMPOSITION

Table length 2400mm yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
Table elevation no no no no no no yes yes yes no
Tilting 20/90 20/90 20/90 90/90 90/90 90/90 90/90 90/90 90/90 20/90

SFD with bands yes no no yes no no yes no no yes

Crossed SFD no yes no no yes no no yes no opt.
Without SFD (digital) no no yes no no yes no no yes no
MCR1 collimator with bands yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
MCR2 collimator with iris opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt.
Ralco 302 collimator with
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
bands
Ralco 503 collimator with iris opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt.
Manual Filters opt opt opt opt opt opt opt opt no opt

Section 0: General Index rev. 15 November 2019 – page7/12

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

O-T20s

O-T20sx

O-T20d

O-T90s

O-T90sx

O-T90d

O-T90e

O-T90ex

O-T90ed

Meratel-I
TYPE

COMPOSITION

Automatic filters opt opt opt opt opt opt opt opt opt opt
Transversal tabletop yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
Symmetrical or extra long
opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt.
longitudinal tabletop
Flat or concave tabletop opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt.
II elevation opt. opt. no opt. opt. no opt. opt. no opt.
II (9”, 12”, 13”,14” e 16”)1 opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt.
Variable or fixed focal distance2 opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt.
Fixed or removable compressor yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
X ray 3 sheath opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt.
Integrated4 or single console opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt.
Personalization5 yes. yes. yes. yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

1
Normally used I.I.: Thomson/Thales, Siemens, Thoshiba, Dunlee
2
Usually used with a movable focal device
3
Normally used sheaths: Varian, IAE, Toshiba, Comet, GE, Dunlee, Siemens.
4
The integration type depends on the system composition
5
Upon customer request
Section 0: General Index rev. 15 November 2019 – page8/12
 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

Models manufactured before 2012

O-T20c

O-T20cx

O-T30cs

O-T30csx

O-T90cs

O-T90csx

O-T90ce

O-T90cex

O-T90csd

O-T90ced

O-T90fpe

O-T90fp

Meratel

Meratel-S
TYPE

COMPOSITION

Table length 2100mm yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
Table elevation no no no no no no yes yes no yes yes no no no
Tilting 20/90 20/90 30/90 30/90 90/90 90/90 90/90 90/90 90/90 90/90 90/90 90/90 20/90 30/90

SFD with bands yes no yes no yes no yes no no no no no yes yes

Crossed SFD no yes no yes no yes no yes no no no no opt. opt.
Without SFD (digital) no no no no no no no no yes yes yes yes no no
MCR1 collimator with bands yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no no yes yes
MCR2 collimator with iris opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. no no no no opt. opt.
Ralco 302 collimator with bands yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no yes yes yes yes
Ralco 503 collimator with iris opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. no no opt opt opt. opt.
Siemens6 collimator no no no no no no no no yes yes no no no no
Manual filters opt opt opt opt opt opt opt opt no no opt opt opt opt
Automatic filters opt opt opt opt opt opt opt opt yes yes opt opt opt opt
Transversal tabletop yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

6
Automatic collimator: Siemens without iris with automatic filters
Section 0: General Index rev. 15 November 2019 – page9/12
 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

Models manufactured before 2012

O-T20c

O-T20cx

O-T30cs

O-T30csx

O-T90cs

O-T90csx

O-T90ce

O-T90cex

O-T90csd

O-T90ced

O-T90fpe

O-T90fp

Meratel

Meratel-S
TYPE

COMPOSITION
Symmetric and asymmetric
opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt.
longitudinal tabletop
Concave and flat tabletop opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt.
II elevation opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. no no no no opt. opt.
II (9”, 12”, 13”,14” e 16”)7 opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. no no no no opt. opt.
Flat Panel 8 no no no no no no no no yes yes yes yes no no
Fixed or variable Focal distance 9 opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt.
Fixed or removable compressor yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes opt. opt. yes yes yes yes
X ray sheath 10 opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt.
Integrated or single console 11 opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt.
Personalization 12 yes. yes. yes. yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

7
Normally used I.I.: Thomson/Thales, Siemens, Thoshiba, Dunlee
8
Flat panel (Dira o Trixell)
9
Usually with variable focal device
10
Normally used sheaths:Varian, IAE, Toshiba, Comet, GE, Dunlee, Siemens
11
The integration type depends on the system composition
12
Upon customer request
Section 0: General Index rev. 15 November 2019 – page10/12
 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

Models manufactured after 2012

O-T20c

O-T20cx

O-T30cs

O-T30csx

O-T90cs

O-T90csx

O-T90ce
T90cex
O-
T90csd
O-
T90ced
O-

O-T90fpe

O-T90fp

Meratel
S
Meratel-

Gastro
MODEL

COMPOSITION
Table length 2100mm yes yes yes no yes no yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
Table length 2400mm no no no yes no yes no yes no no no no no no no
Table elevation no no no no no no yes yes no yes yes no no no no
20/9
Tilting 0
20/90 30/90 30/90 90/90 90/90 90/90 90/90 90/90 90/90 90/90 90/90 20/90 30/90 30/90
150 o 150 o 150 o 150 o 150 o 150 o
Variable or fixed focal 150/180cm 13 150 150
180 180 180 180 180 180
150 150 150 150 150 150 fixed

SFD with bands + IBTV yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no no yes yes no
Crossed SFD + IBTV no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no no opt. opt. no
Static detector (RAD) + IBTV 14 no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no no no no no
Dynamic detector (RF) 15 no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no
Grid 1 1 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1 /2 1/2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

II elevation opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. no no no no opt. opt. no
Transversal tabletop yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
Symmetric and asymmetric
longitudinal tabletop
opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. no
Concave and flat tabletop opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt.

13
Normally with variable focal distance at 150cm, variable focal distance at 180cm or fixed focal distance as option.
14
Without SFD (digital), static detector with parking position
15
Without SFD (digital), dynamic detector
Section 0: General Index rev. 15 November 2019 – page11/12
 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

Models manufactured before 2012

O-T20c

O-T20cx
T30cs/E
O-
T30csx/E
O-
T90cs/E
O-
T90csx/E
O-
T90ce/E
O-
T90cex/E
O-
T90csd
O-
T90ced
O-

O-T90fpe

O-T90fp

Meratel

Meratel-S

Gastro
TYPE

COMPOSITION
MCR1 collimator with bands yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no no yes yes no
MCR2 collimator with iris opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. no no no no opt. opt. no
Ralco 302 collimator with bands yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no yes yes yes yes yes
Ralco 503 collimator with iris opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. no no opt. opt. opt. opt. opt.
Siemens collimator 16 no no no no no no no no yes yes no no no no no
Manual filters opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. no no opt. opt. opt. opt. opt.
Automatic filters opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. yes yes opt. opt. opt. opt. opt.
I.I. (9”, 12”, 13”,14” e 16”) 17
opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. no no no no opt. opt. 9”/12”

Flat Panel 18 no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no
Fixed or removable compressor yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
X ray sheath 19 opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt.
20
Integrated or single console opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt. opt.
Personalization 21 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

/E Evolution versions utilize only SFD with dynamic detector (no IB or Cassette)

16
Siemens collimator with bands and automatic filters
17
Normally used I.I.: Thomson/Thales, Siemens, Thoshiba, Dunlee
18
Flat panel (Dira , Trixell, Toshiba or Varex)
19
Normally used sheaths: Varex, IAE, Toshiba, Comet, GE, Dunlee, Siemens.
20
The integration type depends on the system composition
21
Upon customer request
Section 0: General Index rev. 15 November 2019 – page12/12
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Section 1: Setup procedure - rev. 14 November 2019.

1. Setup procedure............................................................................................................................ 2
1.1 Control panel controls .......................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Commands from the remote-keyboard ................................................................................ 4
1.3 Installation codes.................................................................................................................. 6

Notes:

Section 1: Setup procedure - rev. 14 November 2019 – page 1/14

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1. Setup procedure


As an alternative to the following procedure, you can use the Teleservice
Tool to perform the equipment Setup. Refer to the “Telediagnosis
Manual”.

The table is supplied to the customer with all its adjustments already executed at the manufacturing
plants during the testing and according to the purchase order: this is why it normally does not
require any other adjustment intervention, unless a failure occurs or a modification in the equipment
configuration is required.
The setup procedure allows:
• the proper combination between the reference potentiometer and the mechanical axis and
the subsequent acquisition of the end-of-stroke values.
• The setting and the modification of the installation configuration according to the specific
needs set by the room characteristics.
• The modification of the adjustment values applying to some movements.
• The extra-low speed movement of some motors.
This special procedure can be used in the following cases:
• During the startup phase and testing phase of the equipment.
• During the phase of installation at the customer’s.
• During the maintenance or fixing/repair intervention on the equipment, in case the
mechanical removal of potentiometers or modifications of the end-of-stroke values are
necessary.
After activating the Setup procedure, the normal functioning of the table will be deactivated except
that for some push-buttons, control-panel displays and the operator’s keyboard which functions are
modified.
To enter the Setup modality it will be sufficient to set the Sw1.1 dip-switch present on the I/O 25S3
board (Fig. 3 page 14) onto the ON position
After executing the necessary operations, it will be sufficient to restore the 25S3-Sw1.1 OFF
position and the equipment will start up again taking into account the new values and parameters
set.
The installation code is divided in two parts:
the <transmission code>, visualised on LE2,3,4 (that can be modified through the P34 and P35
push-buttons), identifies the transmission or the part to be modified; while the <code value>,
visualised on LE5,6,7 (that can be modified through the P31 o P66 and P32 o P67 push-buttons),
indicates the value that can be assumed by the code concerned.
Each <code> is combined with possible <values> that can be assumed by the code.
The low-speed movement of the motors is used to move the axis onto the necessary position for the
subsequent acquisition of the end-of-stroke value.
In order to acquire or modify an end-of-stroke value, it is necessary to move the axis to the end-of-
stroke concerned, enter the Setup modality, select the relevant code and value and move the axis to
the position by means of the push-buttons of the operator’s keyboard.
The push-buttons and relevant meanings are indicated in Fig. 1: page 3 and Fig. 2: page 4.

Section 1: Setup procedure - rev. 14 November 2019 Page 2/14

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.1 Control panel controls

P34 Increase of the code of the transmission currently selected.

P35 Decrease of the code of the transmission currently selected.
P31 o P66 Choice of the lower limit of the selected code.
P32 o P67 Choice of the higher limit of the selected code.
P33 <ENTER> push-button for memorising the new values
P57or P48 <RESET> push-button for eliminating the modifications
LE2,3,4 “Layer height display”: visualisation of the transmission code
LE5,6,7 ‘Tilting angle display: visualisation of the code values

LE2,3,4 LE5,6,7

P34
P35
P57
P33

P31 P32 P48 P66 P67

Fig. 1: Topographic drawing of the control panel in Setup modality

Section 1: Setup procedure - rev. 14 November 2019 – page 3/14

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.2 Commands from the remote-keyboard

PP44B
PP44A PP44C

PP67 PP39
PP44D

Fig. 2: Topographic drawing of the remote-keyboard in Setup modality

P Rx 
 → C A
   
Tilting 44A 44C 39
Elevation 44B 44D 67
Stand 44A 44C 39
Longitudinal tabletop 44A 44C 39
SFD 44A 44C 39
FD 44B 44D 39
I.I. 44B 44D
Cassette ⊥ 44A 44C
Diaphragms // 44B 44D
Cassette // 44B 44D
Grid 44B 44D
Diaphragms ⊥ 44B 44D
Collimator filters 44B 44D 39

KEY NOTES
(The movements are considered as to be seen from the keyboard side)
 Counter-clockwise movement
 Clockwise movement
 Upwards movement
 Downwards movement
 Leftwards movement
→ Rightwards movement
A Movement to open (or towards the loading position)
C Movement to close (or towards the parking position)
P Movement towards the parking position
Rx Movement towards the loading position
 Fast movement (coupled to equipment movement)

Section 1: Setup procedure - rev. 14 November 2019 Page 4/14

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

25S3-Sw1.1

Fig. 3: 25S3 I/O board – Topographic drawing

Section 1: Setup procedure - rev. 14 November 2019 – page 5/14

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3 Installation codes

The values must be inserted by following the Setup Procedure at page 11.


The values written in bold type indicate the default datum.
The asterisk indicates the value that is normally set during the Testing.
The symbol <x> near the code indicates that the default value is <000>, having
no effects: it is necessary to choose a value among those at your disposal.
The codes with no signs, are set according to the sale order and mechanical
structure.

Code Value Description

001 x 001 Adjustment of the Tilting minimum end-of-stroke
002 Adjustment of the Tilting maximum end-of-stroke
002 x 001 Adjustment of the Elevation minimum end-of-stroke
002 Adjustment of the Elevation maximum end-of-stroke
003 x 001 Adjustment of the Stand minimum end-of-stroke
002 Adjustment of the Stand maximum end-of-stroke
004 x 001 Adjustment of the SFD minimum end-of-stroke
002 Adjustment of the SFD maximum end-of-stroke
005 x 001 Adjustment of the min. end-of-stroke of the collimator parallel blades
002 Adjustment of the max. end-of-stroke of the collimator parallel blades
006 x 001 Adjustment of the min. end-of-stroke of the collimator perpend. blades
002 Adjustment of the max. end-of-stroke of the collimator perpend. blades
007 x 001 Adjustment of the min. end-of-stroke of the collimator iris blades
002 Adjustment of the max. end-of-stroke of the collimator iris blades
008 x 001 Adjustment of the parallel jaws or transversal tabletop minimum end-of-stroke
002 Adjustment of the parallel jaws or transversal tabletop maximum end-of-stroke
009 x 001 Adjustment of the perpendicular jaws minimum end-of-stroke
002 Adjustment of the perpendicular jaws maximum end-of-stroke
010 230 Room height = 2300mm (only for T20c versions)
240 Room height = 2400mm (only for T20/30/90c and T90ce versions )
250 Room height = 2500mm (only for T20/30/90c and T90ce versions )
260 Room height = 2600mm1
270 Room height = 2700mm
280 Room height = 2800mm
290 Room height = 2900mm
300 Room height = 3000mm
310 Room height = 3100mm
320 Room height = 3200mm
* 330 Room height = 3300mm

1
With the O-t90e version, the room height to be considered is 2650 mm.
Section 1: Setup procedure - rev. 14 November 2019 Page 6/14
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Code Value Description

011 091 Dimension of 9” I.I. with CCD
092 Dimension of 9” I.I. with I.I. height of 518mm
093 Dimension of 9” I.I. with I.I. height of 597mm
094 Dimension of 9” I.I. with I.I. height of 636mm
095 Dimension of 9” I.I. with I.I. height of 670mm
099 Dimension of 9” I.I. without height limitation
121 Dimension of 12” I.I. with CCD
122 Dimension of 12” I.I. with analogical TV camera and CCD for digital
123 Dimension of 12” I.I. with I.I. height of 636mm
124 Dimension of 12” I.I. with I.I. height of 670mm
131 Dimension of 13” I.I. with CCD
132 Dimension of 13” I.I. with analogical TV camera and CCD for digital
133 Dimension of 13” I.I. with height of 636mm
134 Dimension of 13” I.I. with height of 670mm
014 Dimension of 14” I.I.
016 Dimension of 16” I.I.
021 Dimension of 11”x13” dynamic detector
022 Dimension of 13”x11” dynamic detector
023 Dimension of 16”x13” dynamic detector
0122 05 Counter-clockwise tilting limitation -5°
10 Counter-clockwise tilting limitation -10°
20 Counter-clockwise tilting limitation -20°
30 Counter-clockwise tilting limitation -30°
45 Counter-clockwise tilting limitation -45°
87 Counter-clockwise tilting limitation -87°
88 Counter-clockwise tilting limitation -88°
89 Counter-clockwise tilting limitation –89°
90 Counter-clockwise tilting limitation -90°
013 05 Counter-clockwise tilting limitation 5°
10 Counter-clockwise tilting limitation 10°
20 Clockwise tilting limitation 20°
30 Clockwise tilting limitation 30°
45 Clockwise tilting limitation 45°
87 Clockwise tilting limitation 87°
88 Clockwise tilting limitation 88°
89 Clockwise tilting limitation 89°
* 90 Clockwise tilting limitation 90°
014 115 Focal distance limitation at 115cm for left wall limitation
135 Focal distance limitation at 130cm for left wall limitation
* 150 Focal distance limitation at 150cm for left wall limitation
180 Focal distance limitation at 180cm for left wall limitation
015 115 Focal distance limitation at 115cm for right wall limitation
135 Focal distance limitation at 135cm for right wall limitation
* 150 Focal distance limitation at 150cm for right wall limitation
180 Focal distance limitation at 180cm for right wall limitation
016 * 001 Cassette dimension in cm
002 Cassette dimension in inches

2
With configuration code 290 value 004 (OT20c) and code 011 value 016-095-124-123-134-133-094 (I.I. dimension), the values 005 – 010 – 020 –
030 of code 012, are not accepted (0° limitation).
Section 1: Setup procedure - rev. 14 November 2019 – page 7/14
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Code Value Description

017 001 SFD with vertical divisions (up to 4 divisions)
002 SFD with vertical and crossed-divisions
003 SFD not present
004 SFD with static detector (Toshiba,Varian) and I.I:
005 SFD with dynamic detector (Trixell)
006 SFD with Flashpad detector (GE)
007 SFD with vertical divisions (up to 6 divisions)
008 Manual SFD (for dynamic detectors with manual grids)
018 001 DFR modality present, not priority at switching on
002 DFR modality present, priority at switching on
003 DFR not available (only SFD and Direct)
004 DFR, SFD and Direct Mode from Remote
019 001 GMM Collimator MCR2 type - iris blades present
002 GMM Collimator MCR1 Type- iris blades not present
003 Ralco collimator R302A Type - iris blades not present
* 004 Collimator not present
005 Ralco collimator type R503A - iris blades present
006 Ralco collimator type R302A or R503A – with automatic filters – and
Iris blades
007 Ralco collimator type R302A with automatic filters – without Iris blades

020 001 Flat tabletop with symmetric longitudinal displacement

002 Flat tabletop without longitudinal displacement
003 Concave tabletop with symmetric longitudinal displacement
004 Concave tabletop without longitudinal displacement
005 Tabletop with longitudinal displacement, present but dismount
006 Flat tabletop with symmetric longitudinal displacement stroke 1500 mm
007 Concave tabletop with symmetric longitudinal displacement stroke 1500
mm
008 Flat tabletop with longitudinal asymmetric displacement stroke 1010 mm
(860 sx - 150 dx)
009 Concave tabletop with long. asymmetric displacement stroke 1010 mm
(860 sx - 150 dx)
010 Flat tabletop with longitudinal asymmetric displacement stroke 950 mm
(800 sx - 150 dx)
011 Concave tabletop with long. asymmetric displacement stroke 950 mm
(800 sx - 150 dx)
012 Flat tabletop with longitudinal asymmetric displacement stroke 1200 mm
(1000 sx - 200 dx)
013 Concave tabletop with longitudinal asymmetric displacement stroke
1200 mm (1000 sx - 200 dx)
014 Flat tabletop with symmetric longitudinal displacement stroke 1600 mm
015 Concave tabletop with symmetric longitudinal displacement stroke 1600
mm
021 150 Correction of // over-collimation on film
022 150 Correction of ⊥ over-collimation on film
Section 1: Setup procedure - rev. 14 November 2019 Page 8/14
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Code Value Description

023 150 Correction of iris over-collimation on film
024 500 Correction of // under-collimation on I.I. entire field
025 500 Correction of ⊥ under-collimation on I.I. entire field
026 500 Correction of iris under-collimation on I.I. entire field
027 500 Correction of // under-collimation on I.I. 1st zoom
028 500 Correction of ⊥ under-collimation on I.I. 1st zoom
029 500 Correction of iris under-collimation on I.I. 1st zoom
030 500 Correction of // under-collimatorion on I.I. 2nd zoom
031 500 Correction of ⊥ under-collimation on I.I. 2nd zoom
032 500 Correction of iris under-collimation on I.I. 2nd zoom
033 500 Correction of // under-collimation on I.I. 3rd zoom
034 500 Correction of ⊥ undercollimation on I.I. 3rd zoom
035 500 Correction of iris under-collimation on I.I. 3rd zoom
036 001 Automatic increase value of tomographic layer height
037 060 Correction of tomo angle on film 8°/0,4s or Tomosynthesis 5° in DFR
038 060 Correction of tomo angle on film 8°/0,8s or Tomosynthesis 8° in DFR
039 060 Correction of tomo angle on film 20°/0,6s or Tomosynthesis 20° in DFR
040 060 Correction of tomo angle on film 20°/1,2s or Tomosynthesis 30° in DFR
041 060 Correction of tomo angle on film 40°/1,2s or Tomosynthesis 40° in DFR
042 060 Correction of tom angle on film 40°/2,5s or Tomosynthesis 50° in DFR
043 050 Correction of DFR tomographic angle 8°/0,4s
044 050 Correction of DFR tomographic angle 8°/0,8s
045 050 Correction of DFR tomographic angle 20°/0,6s
046 050 Correction of DFR tomographic angle 20°/1,2s
047 050 Correction of DFR tomographic angle 40°/1,2s
048 050 Correction of DFR tomographic angle 40°/2,5s
049 005 Correction of layer height in tomography on SFD
050 005 Correction of layer height in tomography/tomosynthesis on digital system
051 051 Correction of parallel diaphragms spaces
052 051 Correction of the longitudinal cassette-holder zero end-of-stroke
053 005 Correction of the crossed-diaphragms zero end-of-stroke or second grid
054 051 Correction of the grid zero end-of-stroke
055 051 Correction of the transversal cassette-holder zero end-of-stroke
056 051 Transversal cassette-holder spaces correction
057 001 I.I. position in fluoroscopy at switching on
002 I.I. position in radiography at switching on
003 Fixed I.I.
058 001 Integrated generator O-G50/80
002 Universal generator type 1 - not integrated
003 Universal generator type 2 - not integrated and without tomo angles
004 Integrated generator O-Gxxx (Indico 100)
005 Universal generator type 3- not integrated
006 Generator O-Gxxx (Indico 100) integrated for GE
007 Generator O-Gxxx (Indico 100) with GMM touch screen (Special filters)
Section 1: Setup procedure - rev. 14 November 2019 – page 9/14
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Code Value Description

008 Generator O-Gxxx (Indico 100) integrated for Icynergy or Nexus
059 001 Pulsed fluoroscopy activated
002 Pulsed fluoroscopy not activated
060 x 001 Tilting operation adjustment – offset
002 Tilting operation adjustment – dynamic adjustments
061 x 001 Elevation operation adjustment – offset
002 Elevation operation adjustment – dynamic adjustments
062 x 001 Stand operation adjustment – offset
002 Stand operation adjustment – dynamic adjustments
063 x 001 SFD operation adjustment – offset
002 SFD operation adjustment – dynamic adjustments
064 x 001 Focal distance step-by-step movement - with photocell
002 Focal distance step-by-step movement – without photocell
065 x 001 I.I. step-by-step movement – with photocell
002 I.I. step-by-step movement – without photocell

066 x 001 Transversal cassette-holder step-by-step movement – with photocell

002 Transvers. cassette-holder step-by-step movement – without photocell
067 x 001 Parallel diaphragms step-by-step movement – with photocell
002 Parallel diaphragms step-by-step movement – without photocell
068 x 001 Longitudinal cassette-holder step-by-step movement – with photocell
002 Longitudin. cassette-holder step-by-step movement – without photocell
069 x 001 Grid step-by-step movement – with photocell
002 Grid step-by-step movement – without photocell
070 x 001 Crossed-diaphragm step-by-step movement or second grid – with
photocell
002 Crossed-diaphragm step-by-step movement or second grid – without
photocell
071 001 With Angiostep modality
002 Whitout Angiostep modality
072 001 D2000 or D4000 or DFR digital system not present (analogic systems
with I.I.)
002 D2000 or D4000 or DFR present (digital systems)
003 D4000RAD-Pxx with analogic systems with I.I. present
004 D4000RAD-Pxx with digital systems with I.I. present
073 x 001 Display adjustment on the display – minimum value
002 Display adjustment on the display – maximum value
074 x 001 Adjustment of longitudinal tabletop minimum end-of-stroke
002 Adjustment of longitudinal tabletop maximum end-of-stroke
075 * 001 Mobile area speed and angle = max
002 Mobile area speed and angle = max / 1.5
003 Mobile area speed and angle = max / 1.5 in fluoroscopy
004 Mobile area speed and angle = max / 3 in fluoroscopy
076 001 Step movable 150 cm focal distance
002 Fixed 115 cm focal distance
003 Stepless movable 150 cm focal distance
Section 1: Setup procedure - rev. 14 November 2019 Page 10/14
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Code Value Description

004 Step movable 180 cm focal distance with double grid
005 Stepless movable 180 cm focal distance with double grid
006 Step movable 180 cm focal distance with single grid
007 Stepless movable 180 cm focal distance with single grid
077 * 001 P48 push-button function = 'horizontal tilting stop' activated
002 P48push-button function = 'horizontal tilting stop ' deactivated
078 * 001 P29 push-button function = 'Room lighting system'
002 P29 push-button function = 'spot filming programme progression'
079 001 Stopped grid, movement only for parking
* 002 Movable grid in SDF stopped in DFR
003 Movable grid
004 Grid not present or cut out
005 Stopped grid, movement only for parking, remote control
006 Movable grid in SGF, fixed grid in DFR, remote control
080 * 001 In semiautomatic way: fluoroscopy collimation = to radiography
002 In semiautomatic way: perpendicular side collimation open to film size in
radiography (perpendicular blades and iris)
003 In semiautomatic way: perpendicular side collimation open to film size in
radiography, if not collimated open in fluoroscopy (perpendicular blades and
iris)
004 Semiautomatic perpendicular side collimation: the perpendicular blades open
on the to film size in radiography if it is not collimated in fluoroscopy, the iris
blades open always to film size on radiography

081 001 Periscanning/stitching modality on detector present

002 Periscanning/stitching modality not present
003 Periscanning/stitching modality on I.I. present
082 001 Wallstand combined with table
002 Wallstand combined with ceiling suspension
003 Wallstand not present
90 -300 Automatic wallstand combined with table
083 001 Minimum end of stroke calibration, automatic filter
002 Maximum end of stroke calibration, automatic filter
084 001 With Longitudinal tabletop step by step further than 120mm
002 Without Longitudinal tabletop step by step further 120mm
003 Longitudinal tabletop output blocked towards the floor to ±80°
085 001 Digital Tomo present
002 Digital Tomo not present
003 Tomo present, external selection
004 Tomo not present
086 002 I.I. or detector with full field and two enlargements
* 003 I.I. or detector with full field and three enlargements
087 001 Tomo 30° active
* 002 Tomo 30° not active
088 060 Correction of tomo angle on film 30°/1,2s
089 060 Correction of tomo angle on film 30°/2,5s
090 050 Correction of tomo angle DFR 30°/1,2s
091 050 Correction of tomo angle DFR 30°/2,5s
092 001 Tomo 50° active
Section 1: Setup procedure - rev. 14 November 2019 – page 11/14
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Code Value Description

* 002 Tomo 50° not active
093 060 Correction of tomo angle on film 50°
094 060 Correction of tomo angle on film 50°
095 050 Correction of tomo angle DFR 50°
096 050 Correction of tomo angle DFR 50°
097 * 002 Tomo angle 5° or free from 10÷50° not active
5 or Tomo angle 5° (standard tomo) or free (tomo with fixed angle) from
10÷50 10÷50° active
098 060 Correction of tomo angle on film 5°/0,4s or free from 10÷50°
099 060 Correction of tomo angle on film 5°/0,8s or free from 10÷50°
100 050 Correction of tomo angle DFR 5°/0,4s or free from 10÷50°
101 050 Correction of tomo angle DFR 5°/0,8s or free from 10÷50°
102 * 001 Standard tomo active
002 Tomo with fixed angle active
103 * 001 SFD internal diaphragms present
002 SFD internal diaphragms not present
104 001 RAD exposure delay for Toshiba 4343 WiFi detector active
* 002 RAD exposure delay for Toshiba 4343 WiFi detector not active
105 001 Virtual scanning present
002 Virtual scanning not present
106279 000 available
280 * 001 Grid parking standard stroke
002 Grid parking long stroke (standard + 50 mm)
281 * 001 Remote console present
002 Remote console not present
282 * 001 Standard console present
002 Gastro console present
003 Hybrid console present
004 Regular console present
005 GMM console with touch screen
283 001 Movements enable activated
002 Movements enable not activated
284 000 Change Password
285 001 Intelligent Titling activated
002 Intelligent Titling not activated
286 001 Stretchers safety activated
002 Stretchers safety not activated
287 001 Operations S6-S7-S8 set to 400 steps/revolution
002 Operation S6 set to 3200 steps/revolution
003 Operation S7 set to 3200 steps/revolution
004 Operation S6-S7 set to 3200 steps/revolution
005 Operation S8 set to 3200 steps/revolution
006 Operation S6-S8 set to 3200 steps/revolution
007 Operation S7-S8 set to 3200 steps/revolution
008 Operation S6-S7-S8 set to 3200 steps/revolution
288 001 SW filter for ADC OFF
* 002 SW filter for ADC ON
Section 1: Setup procedure - rev. 14 November 2019 Page 12/14
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Code Value Description

289 001 Transmission longitudinal tabletop head-side
* 002 Transmission longitudinal tabletop foot-side

Code Value Description

290 001 OT90e equipment (variable height table – long)
002 OT90s equipment (fixed height table – long)
003 OT20s equipment (fixed height table – long)
004 OT20c equipment (fixed height table – short)
005 OT90ce equipment (variable height table – short)
006 OT30/90c equipment (fixed height table – short)
007 OT90ced equipment (variable height table – short – Dira detector)
008 OT30/90csd equipment (fixed height table – short – Dira detector)
009 OT90fpe equipment (variable height table – short – Trixell detector)
010 OT90fpe equipment (variable height table – short – Varian detector)
011 OT90fp equipment (fixed height table – short – Trixell detector)
012 OT30 Gastro equipment (fixed height table – short)
3003 007 Filing the default values in E2 Prom

3
The code 300 value 007 destroys the values present inside the Eeprom. It must be used only in case of replacement of the 25S1-U83 for CPU
cod.5536 and component 25S1-MOOG 1531 for CPU cod. 55793
Section 1: Setup procedure - rev. 14 November 2019 – page 13/14
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Blank page

Section 1: Setup procedure - rev. 14 November 2019 Page 14/14

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

Section 2: Error codes - rev. 6 November 2019

1. Error codes ................................................................................................................................... 1

1. Error codes
When one of the following codes is present, the watch-dog activates automatically, a power
drooping occurs and the control panel visualizes the number identifying the kind of alarm: it will be
therefore necessary to reset the equipment.
CODE TRANSMISSION CAUSE
001 Tilting Potentiometer
002 Operation unit protection
003 Motor+dynamo/DAC inverted
004 Motor reversibility
011 Elevation Potentiometer
012 Operation gear protection
013 Motor+dynamo/DAC inverted
014 Motor reversibility
015 Missing synchronism with the tilting
021 Stand Potentiometer
1
022 Operation gear protection
023 Stand in Mobile Area
024 Stand in angle
025 Stand in tomography
026 Stand in Mobile Area+contemporary angle
027 Motor reversibility
028 Angle > 44°
031 SFD Potentiometer
032 Operation gear protection
033 SFD in Mobile Area
034 SFD in angle
035 SFD in tomography
036 SFD in Mobile Area+contemporary angle
037 Motor reversibility
041 FD Zero input alarm
042 Fault operation
051 Parallel collimator Potentiometer
052 Motor
061 Orthogonal collimator Potentiometer
062 Motor
071 Iris collimator Potentiometer
072 Motor
081 Parallel diaphragm Zero input alarm
082 Fault operation

1 If the tabletop longitudinal displacement is available, the alarm code 022 may intervene also in case of damage on the tabletop’s circuit.
Section 2: Error codes - rev. 6 November 2019 - page 1/2
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

091 Crossed-diaphragm or Zero input alarm

092 second grid Fault operation
101 Parallel jaws Potentiometer
111 Perpendicular jaws or Potentiometer
transversal tabletop
112 Transversal tabletop Fault during movement
121 Longitudinal cassette Zero input alarm
122 Fault operation
131 Transversal cassette Zero input alarm
132 Fault operation
133 Central input alarm
141 I.I. Zero input alarm
142 Fault operation
143 Low I.I. input alarm
151 Grid Zero input alarm
152 Fault operation
161 Longitudinal tabletop Potentiometer
163 Motor+dynamo/DAC inverted
164 Motor reversibility
165 Maximum limit active when tabletop is vertical
171 Filters Collimator Potentiometer
172 Motor

096 CPU battery in discharge

097 Movement control at the equipment start up
098 Broken fiber optic / wrong transmission
099 Stand-by
190 Communication error console in Can Bus
1962 System errors
197 Assi board error
198 Transmissiion error on RS232 during installation
199 Transmission error type on RS232
200 E2PROM not present / broken
201 Virgin E2PROM
202 Alarm error not managed

For further explanations on the error codes and the relevant fault research, please
make reference to the Opera-T Troubleshooting Manual
Notes:

2
For old CPU, system codes are 189÷196
Section 2: Error codes - rev. 6 November 2019 - page. 2/2
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019

1. System configuration ................................................................................................................... 2
1.1 Password .................................................................................................................................. 2
1.2 Filing the default data in Eeprom ............................................................................................. 4
1.3 Equipment configuration.......................................................................................................... 5
1.3.1 Equipment version .......................................................................................................................... 5
1.3.2 Console version............................................................................................................................... 6
1.3.3 Step by step operation gear............................................................................................................. 8
1.3.4 SW filter for ADC ............................................................................................................................ 9
1.3.5 Enabling the equipment movements .............................................................................................. 10
1.3.6 Stretcher Safety Device ................................................................................................................. 11
1.3.7 “Intelligent” tilting ....................................................................................................................... 12
1.4 Room configuration ............................................................................................................... 13
1.4.1 Room height limitation .................................................................................................................. 13
1.4.2 Side walls limitation ...................................................................................................................... 15
1.4.3 Low ceiling safety ......................................................................................................................... 19
1.5 I.I. configuration .................................................................................................................... 20
1.5.1 Selection of the I.I. model ............................................................................................................. 20
1.5.2 I.I. fields or detector selection ...................................................................................................... 21
1.5.3 I.I. safety ....................................................................................................................................... 22
1.6 Cassette configuration ............................................................................................................ 23
1.7 SFD configuration .................................................................................................................. 24
1.7.1 SFD diaphragms configuration .................................................................................................... 25
1.8 Collimator configuration ........................................................................................................ 26
1.9 Patient tabletop configuration ................................................................................................ 27
1.10 Configuration for DFR – SFD selection ................................................................................ 29
1.11 I.I. ascent-descent configuration ............................................................................................ 30
1.12 Configuration of the integrated generator .............................................................................. 31
1.13 Pulsed fluoroscopy configuration .......................................................................................... 32
1.14 Angiographic (peristeping) mode configuration .................................................................... 33
1.15 Configuration for D2000 and D4000 digital system .............................................................. 34
1.16 Configuration of the Mobile Area speed................................................................................ 35
1.17 Configuration of the Fixed / Variable Focal distance ............................................................ 36
1.18 P48 push-button function configuration ................................................................................ 37
1.19 P29 push-button function configuration ................................................................................ 38
1.20 Longitudinal tabletop displacement configuration ................................................................ 39
1.21 Grid movement configuration ................................................................................................ 40
1.21.1 Configuration of grid parking stroke ....................................................................................... 41
1.22 Semiautomatic push button in SGF (on a film) configuration ............................................... 42
1.23 Periscanning/Stitching configuration ..................................................................................... 43
1.24 Wallstand configuration ......................................................................................................... 44
1.25 Longitudinal tabletop step configuration ............................................................................... 45
1.26 Tomographic mode configuration .......................................................................................... 46
1.26.1 Configuration of standard or fixed angle tomography............................................................. 47
1.26.2 Configuration of 30° angle in tomography .............................................................................. 48
1.26.3 Configuration of 50° angle in tomography .............................................................................. 49
1.26.4 Configuration of 5° or FREE angle in tomography ................................................................. 50
1.27 Configuration of RAD exposure delay for Toshiba 4343 Wifi detector................................ 51
1.28 Virtual Scanning Configuration ............................................................................................. 52

Notes:
Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 1/52
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1. System configuration


Each equipment is provided with its own “System configuration board”
including all the configuration values set during the Testing.
We suggest you should refer to the board and keep it updated after any
possible technical interventions.

1.1 Password

Please write down the password after having typed in. The technician
is held responsible in case of a lost password


The equipment is shipped with the default password "000"000".
The default password gave the direct access to the setup mode.
In case the equipment default password is changed, please do
remember to type the new password in order to get to the setup
mode.

With no password (it is kept the dafault “password”) : as soon as you enter in the installation
mode, the “layer and tilting angle” will display the value 000, and at this step it is possible to enter
in the installation mode.
With a password (the dafault password was changed): by entering in the installation mode, the
display "layer and tilting angle" will show the value 000, the “tilting angle” will start blinking

The sequence of commands in order to gain access to the installation mode by the password is the
following :
• By means of P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push buttons, choose the “higher”
numerical value password “part” (the numerical value is composed of three numbers)
shown in the “layer” display .
• Choose the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) the “lower” numerical
value password “part” (the numerical value is composed of three numbers) that it is
shown in the display “tilting angle”.
• Do confirm by the P33 (Enter) push button the password, if it is typed the right numerical
value, the display “tilting angle and layer ” will go back to the value 000, the “tilting
angle” display will stop blinking and in addition, it will be possible to access to the
installation mode.
Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 2/52
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Change the password:

The sequence of controls to be made in order to change the password are the following:
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the console display “tilting angle and layer” will show
000).
• Choose by means of P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push buttons, the code concerned
(on the display will be shown “layer”).

CHANGE THE PASSWORD code 284

• Press the P33 (Enter) push button in order to confirm that you are going to change the
password, the value shown on the “layer” display will go back to value 000, the "tilting
angle" with the value 000 displayed, will start blinking.

• By means of P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push button, choose from the “layer”
display the “higher” numerical value password “part” (the numerical value is composed
of three numbers)

• By means of P31 or P66 (backwards) and P32 or P67 (onwards) push buttons, choose
from the “tilting angle” display, the “lower” numerical value password “part” (the
numerical value is composed of three numbers)

STORE THE PASSWORD |__|__|__||__|__|__|

• Press the P33 (Enter) push button in order to store the password. The value shown on the
"layer” and “tilting angle” display will go back to the value 000 and as a result, it will be
possible to start from the first installation code.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1onto OFF in order to quit the Installation programme

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 3/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.2 Filing the default data in Eeprom

The filing of the default data destroys the data already present in the
Eeprom.

The filling of the default data in the Eeprom is executed at the manufacturing plants during the
phase of start up and testing of the equipment and does not need any further updatings, except the
25S1-U83 for CPU board cod. 55361 or 25S1-Moog1531 for CPU board cod. 55793 in case of
components gets damaged and thus must be replaced.
In case the 25S1-CPU Host board must be replaced, it will be sufficient to restore the 25S1-U83 for
CPU board cod. 55361 or 25S1-Moog1531 and for CPU board cod. 55793 component of the
previous board.
This operation filled up the data default in the equipment, and it needs as a following step, to
configurate and acquire all the data default that are in Eeprom.
Please make reference to the following procedure for filing the default data in Eeprom:

The commands sequence to be followed for filing the default data is as follows:
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON ( the control panel display applying to “Tilting layer height
and angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) push-button and P35 (decrease) push-button you shall
select the code concerned (this will be visualised on the “layer height” display).

WRITING IN EEPROM SELECTION code 300

• The value applying to the writing is visualised on the display of the “Tilting angle”.

WRITING ACTIVATION VALUE value 007

• Press the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to enter this function.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 4/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3 Equipment configuration

1.3.1 Equipment version

An inadequate equipment selection may determine possible crashes of

mechanical parts being in movement.

The high degree of integration featuring the Table series allows to manage the software of all the
existing versions by means of a unique programme. The changes between the different equipment
versions are set up during the configuration equipment test and can’t be anymore changed. Please
make reference to the following procedure to change the configuration:

The commands sequence to be executed to select the equipment configuration is as follows:

• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display applying to “Layer height and
tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) push-button and P35 (decrease) push-button, select the
code concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

SELECTION OF THE KIND OF EQUIPMENT code 290

• By means of the P31 or P66 (backwards) push-button and P32 or P67 push-button
(onwards) select the kind of equipment which is visualised on the display “Tilting angle”.

Equipment value
OT90e equipment (variable height table – long) 001
OT90s equipment (fixed height table – long) 002
OT20s equipment (fixed height table – long) 003
OT20c equipment (fixed height table – short) 004
OT90ce equipment (variable height table – short) 005
OT30/90c equipment (fixed height table – short) 006
OT90ced equipment (variable height table – short – Dira detector) 007
OT30/90csd equipment (fixed height table – short – Dira detector) 008
OT90fpe equipment (variable height table – short – Trixell detector) 009
OT90fpe equipment (variable height table – short – Varian detector) 010
OT90fp equipment (fixed height table – short – Trixell detector) 011
OT30 Gastro equipment (fixed height table – short) 012

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display in both cases will go back to the
original value 000 with the button pressed and to the latest value saved when the button
is released.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 5/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3.2 Console version

1.3.2.1 Main console

An inadequate console selection can determine wrong equipment

functioning and possibile crashes of mechanical parts being in movement.

The high degree of integration featuring the equipment allows to manage the software of all the
console versions by means of a unique programme. The changes between the different console
versions are set up during the configuration equipment test and must not be further changed. Please
make reference to the following procedure to select the console type:

The commands sequence to be executed to select the console type is as follows:

• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display “Layer height and tilting
angle” of the console will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) push-button and P35 (decrease) push-button, select the
code concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

TYPE OF CONSOLE code 282

• By means of the P31 or P66 (backwards) push-button and P32 or P67 push-button
(onwards) select the type of console which is visualised on the display “Tilting angle”.

Console value
STANDARD CONSOLE PRESENT (optic fiber) 001
GASTRO CONSOLE PRESENT (Can Bus) 002
HYBRID CONSOLE PRESENT (Can Bus) 003
REGULAR CONSOLE PRESENT (Can Bus) 004
GMM CONSOLE WITH TOUCH SCREEN PRESENTE (Can Bus) 005

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display in both cases will go back to the
original value 000 with the button pressed and to the latest value saved when the button
is released.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.


GASTRO, HYBRID, REGULAR and GMM with TS console types must be
set starting from the standard console or from teleservice.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 6/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3.2.2 Secondary console

Incorrect selecting of the console can cause wrong equipment

functioning.
The remote console is optional.

During the final testing and inspection phase, or as an upgrade later on, it is possible to install and
enable a secondary console and connect it to the main console. Below is the procedure to follow to
select the remote console.

The sequence of commands required to select the secondary console is as follows:

• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display “Layer height and tilting
angle” of the console will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) push-button and P35 (decrease) push-button, select the
code concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

REMOTE CONSOLE TYPE code 281

• By means of the P31 or P66 (backwards) push-button and P32 or P67 push-button
(onwards) select the type of console which is visualised on the display “Tilting angle”.

REMOTE CONSOLE PRESENT value 001

REMOTE CONSOLE NOT PRESENT value 002

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display in both cases will go back to the
original value 000 with the button pressed and to the latest value saved when the button
is released.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 7/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3.3 Step by step operation gear

An inadequate equipment selection of step-by-step operation can determine

possibile crashes of mechanical parts being in movement.


All the equipments without the SW V08 version have a step by step operation set 24S6-24S7-24S8
at 400 steps/revolution.
Since the software V08 version, the equipments are set with step by step operation gear 24S6-
24S7-24S8 at 3200 steps/revolution, and motoreductor with outlet reduction ratio that goes
from Φ 20 to 32mm.
To do an upgrade software equipment operation in case of equipment with installed a preceding
version respect V08, please set the code 287 value 001.
To replace the operations means microstep/motoreductor in case of equipment with installed a
preceding version respect V08, please set properly the code 287.

The commands sequence to be executed to select the step-by-step operation gear is as follows::
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display applying to “ Layer heigt and
tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) key and P35 (decrease), you can select the wanted code
(this is visualised on the “Layer height display”).

SELECTION OF THE OPERATION MEANS STEP BY STEP code 287

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) key the kind of
equipment (this is visualised on the “Tilting angle” display).

OPERATION GEAR S6-S7-S8 set to 400 steps/revolution value 001

OPERATION GEAR S6 set to 3200 steps/revolution value 002
OPERATION GEAR S7 set to 3200 steps/revolution value 003
OPERATION GEAR S6-S7 set to 3200 steps/revolution value 004
OPERATION GEAR S8 set to 3200 steps/revolution value 005
OPERATION GEAR S6-S8 set to 3200 steps/revolution value 006
OPERATION GEAR S7-S8 set to 3200 steps/revolution value 007
OPERATION GEAR S6-S7-S8 set to 3200 steps/revolution value 008

• Press the P33 (Enter) key to store the new value or P57 P48 (Reset) key if you do not
want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value of 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto off to quit the Set up programme.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 8/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3.4 SW filter for ADC


Let the SW filter for ADC not activeted on default, it must be
activated only in case of potentiometers checking.

The commands sequence to be executed in order to select the SW filter for ADC is as follows
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display applying to“Layer height and
tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) key and P35 (decrease) key, you can select the wanted
code (this is visualised on the “Layer height” display).

SELECTION OF THE SW FILTER FOR ADC code 288

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) key and P32 OR P67 (onwards) the kind of
equipment (this is visualised on the display “tilting angle display”).

SW FILTER FOR ADC OFF value 001

SW FILTER FOR ADC ON value 002

• Press P33 (Enter) key if you want to memorise the new value or the P57 o P48 (Reset) if
you do not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the set up programme.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 9/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3.5 Enabling the equipment movements

The movements safety device use is compulsory in all that equipments in

which the safety device was installed
The technician is held responsible of its deactivation.


The double movements control is used in order to avoid unwanted
equipment movements.
The table tilting elevation joystick/cloche controls for driving
stand/Spot film device incidence, patient table top translation, and the
rotating foot rest are activated only if combined with the enable push
button positioned above the control joystick/cloche

The remote small keyboard is activated only if combined with the

enable push button positioned near the small keyboard with the
exception of the cassette in/out control.
If the equipment is made in order to work with double movements
control, it must always be set with "value 001"

The sequence of commands to be executed in order to select the safety movements enable are the
following:
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON, (the control panel display applying to“ Layer height and
tilting angle” will visualise 000)
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push buttons choose the concerned
code (the code is shown on the “layer” display).

MOVEMENTS ENABLE code 283

• by means of P31 or P66 (backwards) and P32 or P67 (onwards) choose the enable safety
movements shown on the “tilting angle display”.

MOVEMENTS ENABLE ACTIVATED value 001

MOVEMENTS ENABLE NOT ACTIVATED value 002
MOVEMENTS ENABLE ACTIVATED ONLY FROM THE value 003
CONSOLE NOT FROM THE SMALL KEYBOARD

• Press the P33 (Enter) key to store the new value or P57 or P48 (Reset) key if you do not
want to.
• the value shown in the “tilting angle” display in both cases will set to value 000 when
keeping pressed the button, but as soon as the button will be released, the value will set to
its last stored value
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the installation programme.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 10/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3.6 Stretcher Safety Device

The Stretcher safety device uses is compulsary
The technician is held responsible of its deactivation


When the tabletop is in vertical position (table tilting higher
than 85°) with the tube rotated (but not aligned with the spot
film device), and the columns movements control activated
(spot film device and stand group, incidence etc) towards the
floor in a position higher than the quote of 140 cm, all the
equipment movements during any operative modes will stop as
soon as they’ve reached the quote of (140 cm). The equipment
movements, will start again to the minimum speed and only
after a further control input, under the quote of (140cm). In
addition, the tabletop will move always at its minimum speed

The sequence of commands to be executed to enable safety device in order to use the stretcher are
the following:
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON, (the control panel display applying to“ Layer height and
tilting angle” will visualise 000)
• By means of P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push buttons, choose the concerned code
(the code is shown on the “layer” display).

ENABLE THE SAFETY DEVICE FOR THE STRETCHERS USE code 286

• By means of P31 or P66 (backward) and P32 or P67 (onward) choose the safety device
stretchers use that it is shown on the “tilting angle” display .

SAFETY DEVICE FOR STRETCHERS USE ACTIVATED value 001

SAFETY DEVICE FOR STRETCHERS USE NOT ACTIVATED value 002

• Press the P33 (Enter) key to store the new value or P57 or P48 (Reset) key if you do not
want to.
• The value shown on the “tilting angle” display in both cases will set to value 000 when
keeping pressed the button but as soon as the button will be released, the value will set to
its last stored value
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the installation programme.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 11/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3.7 “Intelligent” tilting


The “ intelligent” tilting is applying only to the Precision RXi
systems, for the operative use please make reference to the
proper manual

The sequence of commands to be executed in order to select the intelligent tilting are the following:
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON, (the control panel display applying to“ Layer height and
tilting angle” will visualise 000)
• By means of P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push buttons, choose the concerned code
(the code is shown on the “layer” display.

INTELLIGENT TILTING code 285

• By means of P31 or P66 (backward) and P32 or P67 (onward) push buttons, choose the
intelligent tilting shown on the “tilting angle ” display).

INTELLIGENT TILTING ACTIVATED value 001

INTELLIGENT TILTING NON ACTIVATED value 002

• Press the P33 (Enter) key to store the new value or P57 or P48 (Reset) key if you do not
want to.
• The value shown on the “tilting angle” display in both cases will set to value 000 when
keeping pressed the button, but as soon as the button will be released, the value will set to
its last stored value
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the installation programme

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 12/52

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.4 Room configuration

1.4.1 Room height limitation

An inadequate limitation of the room height may involve crashes onto

the ceiling.
You shall determine the exact height of the room in line with the X-ray
tube centre in the longitudinal direction.
Set the exact value of the room.

You shall execute the following sequence of commands in order to introduce the room height
limitation:
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the “Layer height and tilting angle” display of the
control panel will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code concerned (this will be visualised on the “layer height” display).

ROOM HEIGHT LIMITATION Code 010

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons you
can select the wanted room height (this will be visualised on the “Layer height” display).

ROOM HEIGHT: 2.3 MT value 230 (only for OT20c)

ROOM HEIGHT: 2.4 MT value 240 (only for OT20c or OT90c)
ROOM HEIGHT: 2.5 MT value 250 (only for OT20c or OT90c)
ROOM HEIGHT: 2.6 MT value 2601
ROOM HEIGHT: 2.7 MT value 270
ROOM HEIGHT: 2.8 MT value 280
ROOM HEIGHT: 2.9 MT value 290
ROOM HEIGHT: 3.0 MT value 300
ROOM HEIGHT: 3.1 MT value 310
ROOM HEIGHT: 3.2 MT value 320
ROOM HEIGHT: 3.3 MT value 330

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or 48(Reset)
push-button if you do not want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the installation programme.

1
With the O-t90e version, the room height to be considered is 2.65 mt.
Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 13/52
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Applicable to the T20 and T90 versions (Tabletop

length 2400mm):
The code 010 value 330 allows the complete tilting of the equipment
without no limitation.

Applicable to the T20c version (Tabletop length

2100mm):
The code 010 value 310 allows the complete tilting of the equipment
without no limitation.

Applicable to the T30/90c version (Tabletop length

2100mm):
The code 010 value 300 allows the complete tilting of the equipment
without no limitation.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 14/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.4.2 Side walls limitation

An inadequate limitation may involve possible crashes onto the side

walls.

The limitation for the side walls allows you to limit the tilting, stand and focal distance movements
when the longitudinal tabletop is next to either the right side wall (+90) or left side wall (-90).

1.4.2.1 Right side wall

Execute the following sequence of commands to set the right side wall limitation:
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the “Layer height and tilting angle” display of the
control panel will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code concerned (this will be visualised on the “layer height” display).

LIMITATION FOR THE RIGHT SIDE WALL code 015

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons you
can select the wanted side wall limitation (this will be visualised on the “Layer height”
display).

LIMITATION 115cm FFD value 115

LIMITATION 135cm FFD value 135
NO LIMITATION 150cm FFD (valid only with focal distance up to 150cm) or
LIMITATION 150cm FFD (valid only with focal distance up to 180cm) value 150
NO LIMITATION 180cm FFD (valid only with focal distance up to 180cm) value 180

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or 48(Reset)
push-button if you do not want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the set up programme.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 15/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

With Tilting stop from +87° to +90°, the limitation due to the side walls
will intervene beyond +45° for the version T20 and beyond +30° for the
version T30/90.
With Tilting stop at +5°, +10°, +20° or +30° the limitation due to the side
walls will intervene at +6° (to be used only with 90/90 versions)

Applicable to the T90 version (Tabletop length 2400mm):

With tilting limitation at +5°, +10°, +20° and +30° and focal distance
limitation at 115, the outwards movement of the longitudinal tabletop
towards the right lateral wall stop at –45°.
With tilting limitation at +5°, +10°, +20° and +30° and focal distance
limitation at 135, the outwards movement of the longitudinal tabletop
towards the right lateral wall stop or it is limitated at –45°
With the tilting limitation from +87° to +90° and focal distance limitation
at 115, the outwards movement of the longitudinal tabletop towards the
right lateral wall stop at 400mm between –45° and +45° of tilting.

Applicable to the T90c version (Tabletop length 2100mm):

With tilting limitation at +5°, +10°, +20° or +30° and focal distance
limitation at 115, the outwards movement of the longitudinal tabletop
towards the right lateral wall stop at -47° and the right side stand
movement is limited in trendelemburg.
With tilting limitation at +5°, +10°, +20° or +30° and the focal distance
limitation at 135, the outwards movement of the longitudinal tabletop
towards the right lateral wall stop or it is limitated at -47°.
With tilting limitation from +87° to +90° and focal distance limitation at
115, outwards movement of the longitudinal tabeltop towards the right
later wall stop at 400mm between –47° and +47° of tilting.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 16/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.4.2.2 Left side wall

Execute the following sequence of commands to set the right side wall limitation:
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the “Layer height and tilting angle” display of the
control panel will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code concerned (this will be visualised on the “layer height” display).

LIMITATION FOR THE LEFT SIDE WALL code 014

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons you
can select the wanted side wall limitation (this will be visualised on the “Layer height”
display).
•

LIMITATION 115cm FFD value 115

LIMITATION 135cm FFD value 135
NO LIMITATION 150cm FFD (valid only with focal distance up to 150cm) or
LIMITATION 150cm FFD (valid only with focal distance up to 180cm) value 150
NO LIMITATION 180cm FFD (valid only with focal distance up to 180cm) value 180

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48(Reset)
push-button if you do not want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

With Tilting stop from -87° to -90°, the limitation due to the side walls
will intervene beyond–30° for the versions T90
With Tilting stop at -5°, -10° ,-20° or -30°, the limitation due to the side
walls will intervene at -6° for all the versions.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 17/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Applicable to the T20 version (Tabletop length 2400mm):

With focal limitation at 115 and 135, the outwards movement of the
longitudinal tabletop towards left lateral wall stop until +30°.

Applicable to the T90 version (Tabletop length 2400mm):

With tilting limitation at -5°, -10°, -20° or -30° and focal distance
limitation at 115, the outwards movement of the longitudinal tabletop
towards left lateral wall stop until +45°.
With tilting limitation at -5°, -10°, -20° or -30° and focal distance
limitation at 135, the outwards movement of the longitudinal tabletop
towards left lateral wall stop until +45°.
With tilting limitation from -87° to -90° and focal distance limitation at
115, the outwards movement of the longitudinal tabletop towards left lateral
wall stop until 400mm between –45° and +45° of tilting.

Applicable to the T20c version (Tabletop length 2100mm):

With tilting limitation at 115, the outwards movement of the longitudinal
tabletop towards left lateral wall stop until +30° and the stand movement
towards left lateral wall stop in trendelemburg.
With tilting limitation at 135, the outwards movement of the longitudinal
tabletop towards left lateral wall stop until +30°.

Applicable to the T30/T90c version (Tabletop length

2100mm):
With the tilting limitation at -5°, -10°, -20° or -30° and focal distance
limitation at 115, the outwards movement of the logitudinal tabletop
towards left lateral wall stop until +47° and stand movement towards left
lateral wall stop in trendelemburg.
With the tilting limitation at -5°, -10°, -20° or -30° and focal distance
limitation at 135, the outwards movement of the longitudinal tabletop
towards left lateral wall stop or it is limitated until +47°.
Only for T90c versions
With the tilting limitation from -87° to -90° and focal distance limitation at
115, the outwards movement of the longitudinal tabletop towards left lateral
wall stop at 400mm between –47° and +47° of tilting.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 18/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.4.3 Low ceiling safety

The non-installation of the total safety may determine possible crashes

onto the ceiling in case of failure or anomaly.
The installer is held responsible for the non-installation of the Low
ceiling safety.

The Low ceiling total safety is realised by means of a photocell and a reflector (available as external
accessories). Should it be necessary to install the external safety, you shall carry out the following
procedure, taking into account the dimensions specified in the drawing.
Fix the total safety and the reflector according to what indicated in
Fig. 1 e Fig. 2.

<= 4
metri
Reflector

Fig. 1: Low ceiling safety position Fig. 2: Low ceiling safety longitudinal position

The equipment being switched off:

• Move the 25S3-Sw1.4 onto OFF (exclusion of the low ceiling safety).
• Connect the cable of the low ceiling safety to 25S3-AMP2.

The equipment being switched on and power on:

• Place an object between the photocell and the reflector.
• The power supply will be interrupted and the control panel will visualise code 099 on
the “layer height” display . All the equipment’s functions will be deactivated.
• Remove the object: the power-supply will be restored and the equipment will start
functioning again.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 19/52

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.5 I.I. configuration

1.5.1 Selection of the I.I. model

An inadequate selection of the I.I. model may involve possible crashes
onto the floor.

The tables are provided for mounting 23cm, 30cm, 33cm and 40 cm I.I. 2 with CCD cameras or
analogical cameras for normal installation or installations equipped with digital imaging systems.
This possibility has been realised upon specific design in order to eliminate any possible mechanical
problems.
This configuration is executed at the manufacturing plants according to the internal order
specifications and normally does not require any further adjustments. Should you have to modify
this parameter, you shall carry out the following procedure:
The sequence of commands to be executed in order to set the I.I. model is as follows:
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display applying to the ”layer height
and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons you shall select the code
concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

SELECTION OF THE I.I. MODEL code 011

By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons you
•

can select the wanted I.I. model. (This will be visualised on the “Layer height” display).
9” I.I. SELECTION value 091 Combined with CCD camera
9” I.I. SELECTION value 092 Installation with 518mm I.I. being already available
9” I.I. SELECTION value 093 Installation with 597mm I.I. being already available
9” I.I. SELECTION value 094 Installation with 636mm I.I. being already available
9” I.I. SELECTION value 095 Installation with 670mm I.I. being already available
9” I.I. SELECTION value 099 Without I..I. height limitation
12” I.I. SELECTION value 121 Combined with CCD camera
12” I.I. SELECTION value 122 Combined with analogic camera and CCD for digital sys.
12” I.I. SELECTION value 123 Installation with 636mm I.I. being already available
12” I.I. SELECTION value 124 Installation with 670mm I.I. being already available
13” I.I. SELECTION value 131 Combined with CCD camera
13” I.I. SELECTION value 132 Combined with analogic camera and CCD for digital sys.
13” I.I. SELECTION value 133 Installation with 636mm I.I. being already available
13” I.I. SELECTION value 134 Installation with 670mm I.I. being already available
14” I.I. SELECTION value 014 Installation with 670mm I.I. being already available
16” I.I. SELECTION value 016 Combined with analogic camera and CCD for digital sys.
11”x13” SELECTION value 021 Hybrid configuration for Electron
13”x11” SELECTION value 022 Hybrid configuration for Electron
16”x13” SELECTION value 023 Hybrid configuration for Electron

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to confirm it.

2
The I.I. is represented by the “I.I. tube + TV Camera” group
Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 20/52
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

1.5.2 I.I. fields or detector selection

The OPERA equipment allows to assemble the I.I. or RF detector with 3 or 4 fields (full field size
with 2 or 3 enlargements).
In case you should go on changing this parameter, you shall make reference to the following
procedure.

The sequence of commands to introduce the I.I. enlargement is the following:

• Move onto ON the 25S3-Sw1.1 (the console display “layer height and tilting angle” will
visualize 000).
• By means of P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push buttons, select the concerned code
visualized on the “layer” display.
SELECT I..I. OR DETECTOR ENLARGMENTS code 086
• By means of P31 or P66 (backward) and P32 or P67 (onward) push buttons, select the I.I.
that you want to obtain (it will be visualized on the “tilting angle” console display).
SELECT THE I.I. OR DETECTOR WITH FULL FIELD AND 2 value 002
ENLARGEMENTS
SELECT THE I.I. OR DETECTOR WITH FULL FIELD AND 3 value 003
ENLARGMENTS

• Press push button P33 (Enter) to store the new value, and button P57 or P48 (Reset) to
quit the programme .
• By keeping the button pressed, the value visualized on the “tilting angle” console display
will set to the original value 000, in both cases. On the other hand, if you release the push
button, the value will set to the latest values stored.
• Move onto ON the 25S3-Sw1.1 to leave the installation programme

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 21/52

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.5.3 I.I. safety

The non-installation of the total safety may determine possible crashes

of the intensifier tube onto the floor.
The installer is held responsible for the non-installation of the Low
ceiling safety.

In order to avoid any possible crashes of the I.I.3 onto the floor or external objects, the tables have
been provided with a standard I.I. safety. The mechanical dimensions and the kind of connection of
the I.I. safety change according to the table model (T20 or T30/90), while the wiring and the
functioning principle are the same for all types of tables.
When the equipment is configured at GMM’s premises, the installation of the I.I. safety is executed
at the manufacturing plants and it does not require any further adjustments except the height of the
washer that must be checked by the installer.
Should the customer already have at his disposal an I.I. tube, the Table series ensures other
installation codes that the installer will choose according to specific needs.
You shall execute the following procedure:
• Determine the kind and height of the I.I. tube.
• Select the proper value according to the following table (should not the value of I.I. tube +
TV camera height be included within the values specified in the reference table, we suggest
you should select the highest value).
• Install the I.I. safety on the support plate as shown in drawing 43474 (for O-T20).
• Install the support plate.
• Move the “SFD-Stand” group to its right end-of-stroke.
• Adjust the height of the safety washer according to the values indicated in drawing 43474
(for O-T20).
I.I. type 9” 12” 13” 16”
I.I. height
478 091 = = =
518 092 121 131 =
597 093 122 132 =
636 094 123 133 =
670 095 124 134 016
Example: Should the I.I. tube of the Customer be a 9” and have a height of 625mm, you shall select
the value 094 and adjust the height of the washer at 159mm ±1 mm from the floor (drawing 43474
for O-t20).
Checking the I.I. safety functioning:
• Switch on the equipment.
• In manual modality, make the safety intervene.
• The equipment will automatically switch off and the control panel will display a blinking
code: 099; at this point all the movements and functions will be deactivated.
• Release the safety and the equipment will start functioning again.
3 The I.I. is represented by the “I.I. tube + TV camera” group.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 22/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.6 Cassette configuration

An inadequate configuration of the cassettes may determine the non-

acquisition of the cassettes themselves.

The tables are provided for receiving cassettes both in cm and in inches.
Normally the table is configured for accepting cassettes in cm; should you need to change the
configuration, you shall execute the following procedure:
Sequence of commands for realising the cassette configuration:
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display applying to the ”layer height
and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons you shall select the code
concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

CASSETTE CONFIGURATION code 016

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons you
can select the wanted type of cassette. (This will be visualised on the “Layer height”
display).

CASSETTE IN CM value 001

CASSETTE IN INCHES value 002

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.
• By using the whole series of cassette, check that these are properly recognised.


It is possible to verify the dimension of the cassette being inserted by
pressing a second time the push-button applying to the selected division.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 23/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.7 SFD configuration

An inadequate configuration may determine crashes between the

mechanical parts of the SFD.

Normally this configuration is executed at the manufacturing plants and does not need any fhrther
adjustments; anyway, should you need to modify the configuration you shall execute the following
sequence of commands:
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display applying to the ”layer height
and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons you shall select the code
concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

SFD CONFIGURATION code 017

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons you
can select the wanted SFD. (This will be visualised on the “Layer height” display).

VERTICAL DIVISION SFD (up to 4 divisions) value 001

CROSSED DIVISION SFD value 002
WITHOUT SFD value 003
SFD WITH STATIC DETECTOR (TOSHIBA, VARIAN) + I.I. value 004
SFD WITH DYNAMIC DETECTOR (TRIXELL) value 005
SFD WITH FLASHPAD STATIC DETECTOR (GE) value 006
VERTICAL DIVISION SFD (up to 6 divisions) value 007
MANUAL SFD (FOR DYNAMIC DETECTORS MANUAL GRIDS value 008

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 24/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.7.1 SFD diaphragms configuration

SFD with or without internal diaphragms can be mounted on the Opera systems.

Sequence of commands for SFD diaphragms configuration:

• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display “Layer height and tilting
angle” of the console will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) push-button and P35 (decrease) push-button, select the
code concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

SFD DIAPHRAGMS CONFIGURATION code 103

• By means of the P31 or P66 (backwards) push-button and P32 or P67 push-button
(onwards) select the desired configuration which is visualised on the display “Tilting
angle”.

SFD DIAPHRAGMS PRESENT value 001

SFD DIAPHRAGMS NOT PRESENT value 002

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display in both cases will go back to the
original value 000 with the button pressed and to the latest value saved when the button
is released.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.


The use of this configuration depends on the type of SFD mounted on the
table. Diaphragms must be disabled only if a spot film device without
diaphragms is mounted on the table.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 25/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.8 Collimator configuration

An inadequate configuration may determine a bad functioning of the

collimator.

The tables are configured and tested at the manufacturing plants with the collimator specified in the
customer’s order. Normally such a configuration is not subject to any further adjustments, but
should you need to execute a modification you shall carry out the following procedure:
Sequence of commands to be executed in order to configure the collimator:

• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display applying to the ”layer height
and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons you shall select the code
concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

COLLIMATOR CONFIGURATION code 019

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons you
can select the wanted type of collimator. (This will be visualised on the “Layer height”
display).

MCR2 IRIS COLLIMATOR value 001

MCR1 VERTICAL DIVISION COLLIMATOR value 002
R302 MLP RALCO VERTICAL DIVISION COLLIMATOR value 003
WITHOUT COLLIMATOR value 004
R503 or R302 MLP RALCO IRIS COLLIMATOR value 005
R503 or R302 MLP RALCO IRIS COLLIMATOR WITH value 006
AUTOMATIC FILTERS
R302 MLP RALCO VERTICAL DIVISION COLLIMATOR value 007
WITH AUTOMATIC FILTERS

The value 004 is used only for the initial phase of the
installation in order to avoid the intervention of
alarms (determined by the absence of the collimator)
when the equipment is switched on.
You shall absolutely avoid using this value with the
equipment in normal functioning.

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 26/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.9 Patient tabletop configuration

An inadequate configuration may determine a bad functioning during

the cassette division, collimation and tomography operations and may
determine possibile crashes of mechanical parts being in movement
Normally the patient tabletop configuration does not require any adjustments, but should you need
to execute a modification you shall carry out the following procedure:

Sequence of commands to be executed in order to configure the patient tabletop:

• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display applying to the ”layer height
and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons you shall select the code
concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

PATIENT TABLETOP CONFIGURATION code 020

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons you
can select the wanted kind of tabletop. (This will be visualised on the “Layer height”
display).

FLAT LONGITUDINAL SYMMETRIC STANDARD TABLETOP [all tables] value 001

FLAT FIXED TABLETOP [all tables] value 002
CONCAVE SYMMETRIC STANDARD TABLETOP [all tables] value 003
CONCAVE FIXED TABLETOP [all tables] value 004
DISASSEMBLED LONGITUDINAL TABLETOP [all tables] value 005
FLAT LONGITUDINAL SYMMETRIC TABLETOP STROKE 1500 [only long tables] value 006
CONCAVE LONGITUDINAL SYMMETRIC TABLETOP STROKE 1500 [only long value 007
tables]
FLAT LONGITUDINAL ASYMMETRIC TABLETOP STROKE 1010 (860sx-150dx) value 008
[only short tables]
CONCAVE LONGITUDINAL ASYMMETRIC TABLETOP STROKE 1010 (860sx- value 009
150dx) [only short tables]
FLAT LONGITUDINAL ASYMMETRIC TABLETOP STROKE 950 (800sx-150dx) [only value 010
short tables]
CONCAVE LONGITUDINAL ASYMMETRIC TABLETOP STROKE 950 (800sx-150dx) value 011
[only short tables]
FLAT LONGITUDINAL ASYMMETRIC TABLETOP STROKE 1100 (900sx-200dx) value 012
[only short tables]
CONCAVE LONGITUDINAL ASYMMETRIC TABLETOP STROKE1100 (900sx- value 013
200dx) [only short tables]
FLAT LONGITUDINAL SYMMETRIC TABLETOP STROKE 1600 [only long tables] value 014
CONCAVE LONGITUDINAL SYMMETRIC TABLETOP STROKE 1600 [only long value 015
tables]

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 27/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

The value 005 is used only for the initial phase of the
installation or during service in order to avoid the
intervention of alarms (determined by the absence of the
longitudinal tabletop) when the equipment is switched on.
You shall absolutely avoid using this value with the equipment
in normal functioning. Make sure to reset the correct value.

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

In case the longitudinal tabletop option is present, the SFD

displacement will be limited at 160 mm:
from the head-side if the code is 289 value 001
from the feet-side if the code is 289 value 002

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 28/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.10 Configuration for DFR – SFD selection

The sequence of commands for executing the DFR selection configuration is as follows:

• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display applying to the ”layer height
and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons you shall select the code
concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

CONFIGURATION FOR DFR SELECTION code 018

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons you
can select the wanted configuration. (This will be visualised on the “Layer height”
display).

DFR PRESENT BUT NOT PRIORITY AT SWITCHING ON value 001

DFR PRESENT AND PRIORITY AT SWITCHING ON value 002
WITHOUT DFR value 003
DFR and SFD from REMOTE value 004

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48(Reset)
push-button if you do not want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

If the SFD is not present (code 017 value 003), it will only be possible
the acquisition of code 018 value 002.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 29/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.11 I.I. ascent-descent configuration

The tables allow to pre-set the I.I. position at the switching on of the equipment so that the I.I. itself
can be either in the fluoroscopy position (high) or radiography position (low).
In the first case, the image geometry represents the most important aspect, while the speed of the
changing from fluoroscopy over radiography is not so priority (this condition is normally used with
image electronic processing systems); on the contrary, in the second case the priority aspect is
represented by the speed characterising the changing from fluoroscopy to radiography and this
condition is normally used when the working technique is on film.
When the I.I. is the fixed type you shall select value 003.
The sequence of commands to be carried out in order to configure the preferred I.I. position at
switching on is as follows:

• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display applying to the ”layer height
and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons you shall select the code
concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

CONFIGURATION FOR I.I. POSITION AT SWITCHING ON code 057

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons you
can select the wanted position. (This will be visualised on the “Layer height” display).

I.I. IN FLUOROSCOPY POSITION AT SWITCHING ON value 001

I.I. RADIOGRAPHY POSITION AT SWITCHING ON value 002
FIXED I.I. value 003

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48(Reset)
push-button if you do not want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

You shall never select value 003 when the I.I. transmission is present.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 30/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.12 Configuration of the integrated generator

The table is featured by a high degree of integration with the products of the same series, but it also
allows the possibility to configure the system for functioning with a possible generator already
owned by the customer.
The sequence of commands to be executed for selecting the integrated generator is as follows:

• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display applying to the ”layer height
and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons you shall select the code
concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

CONFIGURATION FOR INTEGRATED GENERATOR code 058

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons you
can select the wanted configuration. (This will be visualised on the “Layer height”
display).

INTEGRATED GENERATOR OPERA G 50/80 value 001

UNIVERSAL GENERATOR TYPE 1 value 002
UNIVERSAL GENERATOR TYPE 2 value 003
INTEGRATED GENERATOR OPERA Gxxx (Indico 100) value 004
UNIVERSAL GENERATOR TYPE 3 value 005
INTEGRATED GENERATOR OPERA Gxxx (Indico 100) for GE value 006
INTEGRATED GENERATOR OPERA Gxxx (Indico 100) with touch screen value 007
GMM (filters special version)
INTEGRATED GENERATOR OPERA Gxxx (Indico 100) for ICYNERGY value 008
and NEXUS

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.


The differences between the interface for the OPERA G generator and the
interface for the universal generator are managed by a software
programme, while the hardware of the 25S3-I/O interface board remains
unchanged.
Please make reference to the Table – Interfaces – Vers. 1.3 September
2002 Manual or the next versions.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 31/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.13 Pulsed fluoroscopy configuration

The Table Series allows to configure the pulsed fluoroscopy up to 4 images/sec. according to a
proper combination of three signals of the I/O Board

Pulsed fluoroscopy
U44 U43 U38 Description
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 1 image/s
0 1 0 2 images/s
0 1 1 3 images/s
1 0 0 4 images/s

The sequence of commands to be executed for configuring the pulsed fluoroscopy is as follows:

• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display applying to the ”layer height
and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons you shall select the code
concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

PULSED FLUOROSCOPY CONFIGURATION code 059

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons you
can select the wanted configuration. (This will be visualised on the “Layer height”
display).

PULSED FLUOROSCOPY ACTIVATED value 001

PULSED FLUOROSCOPY NOT ACTIVATED value 002

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48(Reset)
push-button if you do not want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.


It is possible to select the pulsed fluoroscopy only with OPERA G50/80
Generator interface (code 058 value 001) and DFR modality not present
(code 018 value 003).

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 32/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.14 Angiographic (peristeping) mode configuration

The table allows to configure the step modality in the mobile area for Angiography and
phlebography
The sequence of commands to be executed for configuring the Angiostep is as follows:
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display applying to the ”layer height
and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons you shall select the code
concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

CONFIGURATION FOR ANGIOGRAPHY(PERISTEPING) MODALITY code 071

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons you
can select the wanted configuration. (This will be visualised on the “Layer height”
display).

ANGIOGRAPHY (PERISTEPING) MODALITY ACTIVATED value 001

ANGIOGRAPHY (PERISTEPING) MODALITY NOT ACTIVATED value 002

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.


This function works only if the DFR modality is activeted. If the DFR
modality is not selected (018 code value 003) this function doesn’t work.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 33/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.15 Configuration for D2000 and D4000 digital system

The sequence of commands to be executed for selecting the D2000 or D4000 digital system is as
follows:

• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display applying to the ”layer height
and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons you shall select the code
concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

CONFIGURATION FOR D2000 AND D4000 code 072

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons you
can select the wanted configuration. (This will be visualised on the “Layer height”
display).

D2000 or D4000 or DFR digital system not present (analogic systems with I.I.) value 001
D2000 or D4000 or DFR present (digital systems) value 002
D4000RAD-Pxx with analogic systems with I.I. present value 003
D4000RAD-Pxx with digital systems with I.I. present value 004

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48(Reset)
push-button if you do not want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.


With the code 072 value 001, the push buttons to select for the reversal of
the image work as a switches and by selecting them the led will switch on.
With the code 072 value 002, the push buttons to select for the reversal of
the image work as a switches and by selecting them the led will not switch
on but on the other hand it will appeared the push button icon on the
digital monitor

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 34/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.16 Configuration of the Mobile Area speed

The table allows you to select different speeds for the patient longitudinal scanning (Mobile Area)
and angle; these speeds are as follows: No limitation-speed / always limited-speed / limited speed
only in fluoroscopy (ensuring two possibilities):

➢ NO LIMITATION-SPEED: which allows a scanning speed equals to 200 mm/sec. and an angle
speed equals to 160 mm/sec.
➢ ALWAYS LIMITED-SPEED: which limits the scanning speed to 120 mm/sec. and the angle speed
to 100 mm/sec.
➢ LIMITED SPEED ONLY IN FLUOROSCOPY (1ST)which limits the scanning speed to 120 mm/sec
and angle speed to 100mm/sec. only if the fluoroscopy foot control pedal is pressed.
➢ LIMITED SPEED ONLY IN FLUOROSCOPY (2ND): which limits the scanning speed to 60mm/sec.
and angles speed to 60mm/sec. only if the fluoroscopy foot control pedal is pressed.

The sequence of commands to be executed for selecting the mobile area speed is as follows:

• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display applying to the ”layer height
and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons you shall select the code
concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

MOBILE AREA SPEED CONFIGURATION code 075

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons you
can select the wanted configuration. (This will be visualised on the “Layer height”
display).

NO LIMITATION-SPEED (max) value 001

LIMITED SPEED (max/1.5) value 002
LIMITED SPEED ONLY IN FLUOROSCOPY (max/1.5) value 003
LIMITED SPEED ONLY IN FLUOROSCOPY (max/3) value 004

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 35/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.17 Configuration of the Fixed / Variable Focal distance

The table allows the configuration of both fixed and variable focal distance.
The sequence of commands to be executed for selecting the focal distance configuration is as
follows:
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display applying to the ”layer height
and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons you shall select the code
concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

FIXED / VARIABLE FOCAL DISTANCE CONFIGURATION code 076

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons you
can select the wanted configuration. (This will be visualised on the “Layer height”
display).
STEP MOVABLE 150 CM FOCAL DISTANCE value 001
FIXED FOCAL DISTANCE value 002
STEPLESS MOVABLE 150 CM FOCAL DISTANCE value 003
STEP MOVABLE 180 CM FOCAL DISTANCE WITH DOUBLE GRID value 004
STEPLESS MOVABLE 180 CM FOCAL DISTANCE WITH DOUBLE GRID value 005
STEP MOVABLE 180 CM FOCAL DISTANCE WITH SINGLE GRID value 006
STEPLESS MOVABLE 180 CM FOCAL DISTANCE WITH SINGLE GRID value 007
• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or 48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.


By selecting the code 076 value 001, the equipment is allowed to move only by three steps: 115-
135-150. Valid only with focal distance up to150 cm.
By selecting the code 076 value 002 the focal distance is fixed at 115cm
By selecting the code 076 value 003, the equipment is allowed to move for the full stroke, but the
three step movements are in any case the main points. Valid only with focal distance up to150 cm.
By selecting the code 076 value 004 or 006, the equipment is allowed to move only by four steps:
115-135-150-180. Valid only with focal distance up to180 cm.
By selecting the code 076 value 005 or 007, the equipment is allowed to move for the full stroke,
but the four step movements are in any case the main points. Valid only with focal distance up
to180 cm.

Make sure not to select the value 002 if there is a variable focal
equipment, on the contrary, please make sure that the focal distance is
at 115cm.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 36/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.18 P48 push-button function configuration

The function of the P48 push-button of the control panel can be modified.
Normally this push-button deactivates the automatic stop of the table in the horizontal position,
allowing the tilting from the positive position to the negative position in a continuous manner. If
you change the configuration, P48 will have no functions combined with the push-button itself and
the stop of the table will always realise in the horizontal position.
The sequence of commands to be executed for selecting the modification of the P48 push-button
function is as follows:

• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display applying to the ”layer height
and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons you shall select the code
concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

P48 PUSH-BUTTON FUNCTION CONFIGURATION code 077

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons you
can select the wanted configuration. (This will be visualised on the “Layer height”
display).

“HORIZONTAL TILTING STOP” FUNCTION value 001

NO FUNCTION value 002

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48(Reset)
push-button if you do not want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

P48

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 37/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.19 P29 push-button function configuration

The function of the P29 push-button of the control panel can be modified so as to get the “Room
lighting-system switching on” function or the “Spot-filming programme progression”. In this last
case, if you press the P29 push-button during the execution of a Spot-filming, the relevant
programme will advance of one exposure and the value visualised on the “available exposures”
display will decrease.
The sequence of commands to be executed for selecting the modification of the P29 push-button
function is as follows:
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display applying to the ”layer height
and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons you shall select the code
concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

P29 PUSH-BUTTON FUNCTION CONFIGURATION code 078

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons you
can select the wanted configuration. (This will be visualised on the “Layer height”
display).

“ROOM LIGHTING-SYSTEM” FUNCTION value 001

“SPOT-FILMING PROGRAMME PROGRESSION” FUNCTION value 002
• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

P29

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 38/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.20 Longitudinal tabletop displacement configuration

An inadequate longitudinal tabletop displacement selection can

determine possible crashes of mechanical parts being in movement

The table is provided with the standard longitudinal tabletop transmission onto the feet-side. In
order to maintain the compatibility with the first tables for which the standard longitudinal tabletop
transmission was onto the head-side, it is necessary to modify the configuration.
When the transmission is mounted onto the head-side, there will be a subsequent limitation of the
SFD displacement towards the head-side. When the transmission in mounted onto the feet-side, the
SFD displacement will be limited towards the feet-side. In both cases the displacement will be
limited to 160 mm±5.

The sequence of commands to be executed for selecting the longitudinal tabletop transmission for
displacement is as follows:
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display applying to the ”layer height
and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons you shall select the code
concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

LONGITUDINAL TABLETOP TRANSMISSION CONFIGURATION code 289

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons you
can select the wanted configuration. (This will be visualised on the “Layer height”
display).

DISPLACEMENT TRANSMISSION ONTO THE HEAD-SIDE value 001

DISPLACEMENT TRANSMISSION ONTO THE FEET-SIDE value 002

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 39/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.21 Grid movement configuration

The Table series allows to configure the grid and its movement according to the model and room
configuration.

A wrong configuration can determinate wrong X-ray exposure.

The sequence of commands to configure the grid is as follows:

• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display applying to the “Layer height
and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease), push-buttons you shall select the code
concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

GRID MOVEMENT CONFIGURATION code 79

• By means P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons you can
select the wanted configuration (This will be visualised on the “Layer height” display).

STOPPED GRID (only parking movement - X-ray place) value 001

MOBILE GRID MOVEMENT IN SGF (radiography on a film) and FIXED value 002
IN DFR (digital )
MOBILE GRID MOVEMENT (both with radiography on a film or with value 003
digital system)
GRID NOT PRESENT (or movement not present) value 004
STOPPED GRID, EXTERNAL CONTROL (only parking movement - X-ray value 005
place)
MOVABLE GRID IN SGF (X-RAY ON FILM), FIXED GRID IN DFR value 006
(DIGITAL X-RAY), REMOTE CONTROL

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push buttons if you dont want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the installation programme.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 40/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.21.1 Configuration of grid parking stroke

The Table series allows to configure the grid parking stroke according to the SFD type installed.

A wrong configuration can determinate collisions between the SFD

mechanical components.

Function to keep compatibility with lower versions.

The new SFD series allow for a grid parking longer stroke. The longer stroke is necessary on two
oscillating grid systems to take them both out of the x-ray field, when they are in parking position.

The sequence of commands to configure the grid is as follows:

• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display “Layer height and tilting
angle” of the console will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) push-button and P35 (decrease) push-button, select the
code concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

CONFIGURATION OF GRID PARKING STROKE code 280

• By means of the P31 or P66 (backwards) push-button and P32 or P67 push-button
(onwards) select the desired configuration which will be visualised on the display
“Tilting angle”.

GRID PARKING STANDARD STROKE value 001

GRID PARKING LONG STROKE (standard+50mm) value 002

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display in both cases will go back to the
original value 000 with the button pressed and to the latest value saved when the button
is released.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 41/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.22 Semiautomatic push button in SGF (on a film) configuration

The Table series allows to configure the opening diapragm perpendicular to the collimator in
semiautomatic modality on a film size.

A wrong configuration can determinate wrong X-ray exposure

The sequence of commands to be executed in order to change the longitudinal tabletop tansmission
position is as follows:
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display applying to the “Layer height
and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease), push-buttons you shall select the code
concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

SEMIAUTOMATIC PUSH BUTTON CONFIGURATION ON A FILM code 80

• By means P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons you can
select the wanted configuration (This will be visualised on the “Layer height” display).

FLUOROSCOPY COLLIMATION = TO RADIOGRAPHY (the value 001

perpendicular diaphram and the iris open in radiography film size only by
opening the cloche in setting phase)

OPENING COLLIMATION IN PERPENDICULAR SIDE ON A FILM SIZE value 002

SELECTED IN RADIOGRAPHY (the perpendicular diaphram and the iris
open always in radiography film size)

OPENING COLLIMATION IN PERPENDICULAR SIDE ON A FILM SIZE value 003

SELECTED IN RADIOGRAPHY IF NOT COLLIMATED (the pependicular
diaphram and the iris open in radiography film size if they haven’t been
collimated in fluoroscopy)

OPENING COLLIMATION IN PERPENDICULAR SIDE ON A FILM SIZE value 004

SELECTED IN RADIOGRAPHY IF NOT COLLIMATED (the perpendicular
diaphram opens in radiography film size if they haven’t been collimated in
fluoroscopy; the iris opens always in radiography film size)

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push buttons if you dont want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the installation programme

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 42/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.23 Periscanning/Stitching configuration

The table series allows to configurate the periscanning in the mobile area at a stepless speed to be
used for the image spine reconstruction (rhachis) and the lower limbs reconstruction.

The sequence of commands to be executed in order to configure the periscanning modality is as

follows:
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display applying to the “Layer height
and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease), push-buttons you shall select the code
concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

PERISCANNING MODALITY CONFIGURATION code 081

• By means P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons you can
select the wanted configuration (This will be visualised on the “Layer height” display).

PERISCANNING/STITCHING MODALITY ON DETECTOR ACTIVATED value 001

PERISCANNING/STITCHING MODALITY NOT ACTIVATED value 002
PERISCANNING/STITCHING MODALITY ON I.I. NOT ACTIVATED value 003

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push buttons if you dont want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the installation programme.


This function is working only by the DFR modality selection. If the DFR
modality is not present (code 018 value 003) this function is not activeted.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 43/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.24 Wallstand configuration

The Opera table series allows to combine the table with ceiling suspension or wallstand with
cassette sensing and/or with size cassette sensing reading

The sequence of commands to configure combination between table and wallstand are
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display applying to the “Layer height and
tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push buttons you shall select the code
concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

WALLSTAND CONFIGURATION code 082

• By means P31 OR P66 (increase) and P32 OR P67 (decrease) push buttons you shall select
the code concerned (it will visualise on the display “tilting angle”).

WALLSTAND COMBINED WITH TABLE value 001

WALLSTAND COMBINED WITH CEILING SUSPENSION value 002
WALLSTAND NOT PRESENT value 003
AUTOMATIC WALLSTAND COMBINED WITH TABLE value 90÷300

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push buttons if you don’t want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in both
cases by pushing the button, and by releasing the push button will set to the last value stored
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the installation programme


The value between 90 and 300 coincids to the focal distance in cm between
table and wallstand. This focal distance is obtained with table tilted to 90°,
the focal equipment to the distance of 115cm and the tube rotated to 180°
towards the wallstand. Do take out the meter device from collimator to
measure the distance from table collimator to the potter bucky. This final
measure quote distance will be the value to be set for automatic wallstand
combined with table.
This function is not activated.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 44/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.25 Longitudinal tabletop step configuration

The Opera tables allow to activate or disable the descend by step of the longitudinal vertical
tabletop.

The sequence of commands to configure the longitudinal tabletop by step is the following:
• Move onto ON the 25S3-Sw1.1 (the control panel display applying to the “Layer height
and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push buttons, you shall select the code
concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

CONFIGURATION OF THE LONGITUDINAL TABLETOP BY STEP code 084

• By means of P31 or P66 (backwards) and P32 or P67 (onwards) push buttons, you shall
select the configuration wanted (it will visualise on the display “tilting angle”.

LONGITUDINAL TABLETOP BY STEP FURTHER 120MM IF value 001

PRESENT
LONGITUDINAL TABLETOP BY STEP FURTHER 120MM IF IT IS value 002
NOT PRESENT
LONGITUDINAL TABLETOP OUTPUT TOWARD THE FLOOR
FROM 80°BLOCKED value 003

• Press the P33 (Enter) push button to store the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset) push
button, to quit the programme.
• The value visualized on the display “tilting angle” in both cases will go back to the value
000 with the button pressed and by realising the push button will set to the latest stored
value.
• Move onto OFF the 25S3-Sw1.1 to leave the installation programme


This function is activated only if the longitudinal tabletop is present.
The longitudinal tabletop descend further then 120mm with the tabletop in
vetical position it is allowed only by the small keyboard.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 45/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.26 Tomographic mode configuration

The Opera equipment allows to activate or disable the digital tomographic mode.

The sequence of commands to configure the digital tomographic mode is the following:
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display “Layer height and tilting
angle” of the console will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) push-button and P35 (decrease) push-button, select the
code concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

DIGITAL TOMOGRAPHIC MODE CONFIGURATION code 085

• By means of P31 or P66 (backward) and P32 or P67 (onward) push buttons, select the
wanted configuration (this it will be visualizes on the “tilting angle” display).

DIGITAL TOMOGRAPHIC MODE ACTIVATED value 001

DIGITAL TOMOGRAPHIC MODE NOT ACTIVATED value 002
DIGITAL TOMOGRAPHIC MODE ACTIVATED, EXTERNAL value 003
CONTROL
TOMOGRAPHIC MODE NOT PRESENT value 004

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display in both cases will go back to the
original value 000 with the button pressed and to the latest value saved when the button
is released.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.


Tomography in SFD, always present can be deactivated (value 004)
Tomography in DFR (value 001/003) is active only with the DFR mode
selected.
Before activating the table digital tomography function (value 001 and
003), check if this function is present on the digital system.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 46/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.26.1 Configuration of standard or fixed angle tomography

The Opera tables allow to setup standard tomography (fixed speed, angle variable with the layer) or
fixed angle tomography (variable speed, angle fixed with the layer).

The sequence of commands to configure the 50° angle in tomography mode is the following:
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display “Layer height and tilting
angle” of the console will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) push-button and P35 (decrease) push-button, select the
code concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

CONFIGURATION OF STANDARD OR FIXED ANGLE TOMOGRAPHY code 102

• By means of P31 or P66 (backward) and P32 or P67 (onward) push buttons, select the
wanted configuration (this will be visualized on the “tilting angle” display).

STANDARD TOMOGRAPHY MODE ACTIVE value 001

FIXED ANGLE TOMOGRAPHY MODE ACTIVE value 002

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display in both cases will go back to the
original value 000 with the button pressed and to the latest value saved when the button
is released.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.


Fixed angle tomography is a “customer” function which requires the use
of an external console dedicated.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 47/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.26.2 Configuration of 30° angle in tomography

Opera tables allow to enable or disable the 30° angle in tomography.

The sequence of commands to configure the 30° angle in tomography mode is the following:
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display “Layer height and tilting
angle” of the console will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) push-button and P35 (decrease) push-button, select the
code concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

CONFIGURATION OF 30° ANGLE IN TOMOGRAPHY code 087

• By means of P31 or P66 (backward) and P32 or P67 (onward) push buttons, select the
wanted configuration (this will be visualized on the “tilting angle” display).

30° ANGLE MODE IN TOMOGRAPHY MODE ACTIVE value 001

30° ANGLE MODE IN TOMOGRAPHY MODE NOT ACTIVE value 002

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display in both cases will go back to the
original value 000 with the button pressed and to the latest value saved when the button
is released.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.


This function can be activated only if the buttons for selecting the slow and
fast 30° tomography are present on the console.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 48/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.26.3 Configuration of 50° angle in tomography

Opera tables allow to enable or disable the 50° angle in tomography.

The sequence of commands to configure the 50° angle in tomography mode is the following:
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display “Layer height and tilting
angle” of the console will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) push-button and P35 (decrease) push-button, select the
code concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

CONFIGURATION OF 50° ANGLE IN TOMOGRAPHY code 092

• By means of P31 or P66 (backward) and P32 or P67 (onward) push buttons, select the
wanted configuration (this will be visualized on the “tilting angle” display).

50° ANGLE MODE IN TOMOGRAPHY ACTIVE value 001

50° ANGLE MODE IN TOMOGRAPHY NOT ACTIVE value 002

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display in both cases will go back to the
original value 000 with the button pressed and to the latest value saved when the button
is released.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.


This function is active only if the fixed angle tomography is activated.
Fixed angle tomography is a “customer” function which requires the use
of an external console dedicated.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 49/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.26.4 Configuration of 5° or FREE angle in tomography

Opera tables allow to enable or disable the 5° or FREE angle in tomography.

The sequence of commands to configure the 5° or FREE angle in tomography mode is the
following:
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display “Layer height and tilting
angle” of the console will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) push-button and P35 (decrease) push-button, select the
code concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

CONFIGURATION OF 5° OR FREE ANGLE IN TOMOGRAPHY code 097

• By means of P31 or P66 (backward) and P32 or P67 (onward) push buttons, select the
wanted configuration (this will be visualized on the “tilting angle” display).

5° OR FREE ANGLE MODE IN TOMOGRAPHY NOT ACTIVE value 002

5° OR FREE ANGLE MODE IN TOMOGRAPHY ACTIVE value 005 or 10÷50

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display in both cases will go back to the
original value 000 with the button pressed and to the latest value saved when the button
is released.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.

5° angle

This function can be activated only if the buttons for selecting the slow and
fast 5° tomography are present on the console.
FREE angle from 10÷50°:
This function is active only if the fixed angle tomography is activated.
Fixed angle tomography is a “customer” function which requires the use
of an external console dedicated.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 50/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.27 Configuration of RAD exposure delay for Toshiba 4343 Wifi detector
Opera tables allow to interpose an exposure delay when the O-D4000WS digital system with
detettore Toshiba 4343 WiFi detector are present.
Normally, this delay is not present; if it is enabled, the delay is active only for the 43x43 cassette
format.

The sequence of commands to configure the RAD exposure delay for Toshiba 4343 Wifi detector is
the following:
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display “Layer height and tilting
angle” of the console will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) push-button and P35 (decrease) push-button, select the
code concerned (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

CONFIGURATION OF RAD EXPOSURE DELAY FOR TOSHIBA 4343 WIFI code 104
DETECTOR

• By means of P31 or P66 (backward) and P32 or P67 (onward) push buttons, select the
wanted configuration (this will be visualized on the “tilting angle” display).

RAD EXPOSURE DELAY FOR TOSHIBA 4343 WIFI DETECTOR ACTIVE value 001
RAD EXPOSURE DELAY FOR TOSHIBA 4343 WIFI DETECTOR NOT
ACTIVE value 002

• Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to.
• The value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display in both cases will go back to the
original value 000 with the button pressed and to the latest value saved when the button
is released.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019 page 51/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.28 Virtual Scanning Configuration

The sequence of commands to enable virtual scanning is as follows:
• Set 25S3-Sw1.1 to ON (the "layer and tilt angle" display on the console shows 000).
• Use keys P34 (increment) and P35 (decrement) buttons to select the required code (the
"layer and tilt angle" display shows 000).

VIRTUAL SCANNING CONFIGURATION code 105

• Use P31 or P66 (backward) and P32 or P67 (forward) buttons to select the configuration
you want to achieve (this is shown on the "layer" display).

VIRTUAL SCANNING PRESENT value 001

VIRTUAL SCANNING NOT PRESENT value 002

• Choose the P33 (Enter) button to store the new value or P57 or P48 (Reset) button if you
want to cancel.
• The value shown on the "tilt angle" display in both cases resets to the value 000 when the
button is pressed and to the last value stored when it is released.
• Turn 25S3-Sw1.1 to OFF to exit installation.

Blank page

Section 3: Equipment configuration - rev. 13 November 2019. – Page 52/52

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Section 4: Adjustments - rev. 8 November 2019

Index:
Section No. Section title Revision No. Revision date
4.1 Keyboard knob adjustment 0 03/1998
4.2 Tilting 5 06/2007
4.3 Tilting group elevation 3 06/2007
4.4 Stand 5 11/2015
4.5 Spot-Film-Device 6 11/2019
4.6 Preliminary tomographic controls 4 11/2019
4.7 Tomographic controls 2 06/2007
4.8 Longitudinal tabletop displacement 6 11/2015
4.9 Focal distance 4 11/2015
4.10 Collimator 2 06/2007
4.11 Cassette dimensions 3 06/2007
4.12 Transversal tabletop displacement 1 11/2019
4.13 Compressor 1 04/2004
4.14 Parallel diaphragms 2 11/2015
4.15 Crossed-diaphragms 2 11/2015
4.16 Grid 2 11/2015
4.17 Longitudinal cassette-holder 3 11/2015
4.18 Transversal cassette-holder 3 11/2015
4.19 I.I. 4 11/2015
4.20 Tube centering 2 01/2004
4.21 Block by suspension accessory 0 03/1998
4.22 Display adjustment on the stand 1 06/2007
4.23 Focal distance adjustment compensation 0 11/2004

Notes:

Section 4: Adjustments - rev. 8 November 2019 – page 1/1

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Section 4.1: Keyboard knob adjustment - rev. 0 march, 1998

1. Keyboard knob ............................................................................................................................. 1

1. Keyboard knob

The 1S2 board (microprocessor for the keyboard) is provided with the
knob adjustment already executed. An inadequate adjustment may
involve a movement of the axis combined with the knob.

Adjustment of the reading of P44 knob controlling the Mobile Area and the transversal tabletop
and P42 knob controlling the Tilting and Elevation movements.
Connect a digital multimeter on the following:
probe: 1S2-U14-19
0V: 1S2-U14-20
Adjust 1S2-P1 potentiometer so as to read the value of 5V±0,1.
During this phase the P42 and P44 knobs of the control panel MUST NOT be moved.
Check that the following leds are switched off: 25S3-Lv62, Lv68, Lv61, Lv60, Lv65 (activation of
the motor gears applying to tilting, elevation, stand, SFD, tabletop movements)

CN2 CN4
CN1 CN3
U7 - 1
U7 CN5
1S1
U14 - 19

U14 - 20

U14 1S2

P1
CN6

YOU SHALL TAKE ADEQUATE PRECAUTIONS WHILE HANDLING

ELECTRONIC BOARDS.

Section 4.1: Keyboard knob adjustment - rev. 0 march, 1998 - pag. 1/1
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Section 4.2: Tilting adjustment - rev.5 June 2007

1. TILTING.................................................................................................................................................................. 2
1.1 VERIFICATION OF THE TRANSMISSION MOVEMENT DIRECTION ........................................................................ 2
1.1.1 Movement direction .................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 3PT1 POTENTIOMETER ...................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2.1 Position of the reference potentiometer ...................................................................................................... 3
1.2.2 Potentiometer ends........................................................................................................................................... 7
1.2.3 Limitation of the tilting angle ..................................................................................................................... 8
1.2.4 Setup ........................................................................................................................................................... 9
1.2.5 Stop table position ...................................................................................................................................... 9
1.3 23S1 OPERATION UNIT ................................................................................................................................... 10
1.3.1 Preliminary controls ................................................................................................................................. 10
1.3.2 Adjustment trimmer and personalizations ................................................................................................ 11
1.3.3 Speed adjustment ...................................................................................................................................... 11
1.3.4 Offset adjustment ...................................................................................................................................... 12
1.3.5 Gain and overshoot adjustment ................................................................................................................ 13
1.3.6 Acceleration time adjustment.................................................................................................................... 15
1.3.7 Peak current adjustment ........................................................................................................................... 15
1.4 3FC1 TOTAL SAFETY ...................................................................................................................................... 16
1.4.1 Total safety adjustment ............................................................................................................................. 16
1.5 TILTING DEGREE LIMITATION ......................................................................................................................... 17
1.5.1 Tilting limitation on the maximum end of stroke of +90° ......................................................................... 17
1.5.2 Tilting limitation on the minimum end of stroke of -90° ........................................................................... 18

Modifications executed compared with the preceding version:

drawing: The plate for fixing the table to the floor is supplied as a standard accessory.
43482 f.1+ The reference measures are increased of 15 mm.
Drawing The plate for fixing the table to the floor is supplied as a standard accessory for
43482 f.2+ O-T90s. The reference measures are increased of 15 mm. The plate remains an
optional accessory for O-T90e.
Instructions for O-T20c: enclosed.
Instructions for O-T30/90cs and O-T90ce
Added new CPU directions

Section 4.2: Tilting adjustment - rev.5 June 2007 page 1/18

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1. Tilting
1.1 Verification of the transmission movement direction
During this phase the axis movements are free and not subject to the
software control.
Pay your best attention while moving the axis in this situation.

If you have to replace either the motor or tilting reduction gear and/or each time you have to
remove the potentiometer from its housing , it will be necessary to repeat the connection of the
potentiometer with the mechanical axis and then repeat the acquisition of the values applying to the
end-of-stroke.
Should an adjustment be necessary, you shall execute the following procedure.

1.1.1 Movement direction

The sequence of commands to be executed for verifying the tilting transmission direction is as
follows:
• Enter the Setup modality (Section 1 page 2) while moving the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the
display of the control panel applying to “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise
000)
• By means of P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the code
for the tilting transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).
TILTING TRANSMISSION MOVEMENT code 001
• By means of P31 OR P66 (min. END OF STROKE) and P32 OR P67 (max. END OF
STROKE) push-buttons you can select the tilting transmission movement (this will be
visualised on the “tilting angle” display).
VERIFICATION OF THE TILTING TRANSMISSION value 001
• By means of the remote keyboard check that the P44A push-button commands the
counter-clockwise tilting movement, and that the P44C push-button commands the
clockwise tilting movement, P39 increasing displacement movement.
• Otherwise, you shall inspect the wiring of 3Mt1 motor (drawing 55169 f.4+)
• Press P33 (Enter) push-button to confirm or P57 or P48 (Reset) push-button if you do
not want to confirm this operation.
• The value visualised on the tilting angle” display will set to the original value of 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

PP44A PP44C

PP39

Section 4.2: Tilting adjustment - rev.5 June 2007 - Page 2/18

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.2 3Pt1 potentiometer

1.2.1 Position of the reference potentiometer

Normally the reference potentiometer does not require any adjustments, unless it gets damaged
and/or must be replaced.
Should you have to execute any possible adjustments, you shall execute the following procedure:

O-T20s – O-T20c models:

• Move the table to the C value (at 36° tilting angle) according to what shown in Fig. 1: :
drawing 43482 f.1+ page 4..

O-T90s – O-T90e models:

• Move the table to the C value (at the 0° tilting angle) as shown in Fig. 2:dis. 43482 f.2+
page1

O-T30/90c– O-T90ce models:

. Move the table to the C value (at the 0°tilting angle ) as shown in Fig. 3: dis. 43482 f.2A+
pag.6
• Switch off the equipment
• Connect a digital multimeter between:

• Valid for: CPU cod.55361 CPU cod.55973

Vcc probe:25S1-TP2.INAN1 25S1-TP2.1A -INAN1A-
0V probe: 25S1-TP2.0V15 25S1-TP2.17/18A -0V15-
• Switch on the equipment
• Verify that the voltage value on the cursor is of 5Vcc+/-0,05
• Otherwise you shall:
Slightly unloose the two socket-head screws fixing the support square of the
potentiometer.
Turn the potentiometer gear so as to get the proper reading.
Connect the potentiometer gear with the reduction unit gear.
Fix the support square again by means of the screws that were unloosen previously.
• After completing the whole procedure, you shall switch on the equipment and verify the
proper position of the potentiometer by executing the following operations:
Command the clockwise tilting → the voltage on the multimeter shall increase.
Command a counter-clockwise tilting → the voltage on the multimeter shall
decrease.

Check the entire potentiometer gear connections stroke. The lack of

potentiometer gear connections backlash can cause the potentiometer
cursor mechanical wearing/breaking. On the other hand, too much
backlash can cause bad potentiometers functioning
Section 4.2: Tilting adjustment - rev.5 June 2007 page 3/18
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Fig. 1: dis. 43482 f.1+1

Section 4.2: Tilting adjustment - rev.5 June 2007 - Page 4/18

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Fig. 2: dis. 43482 f.2+1

Section 4.2: Tilting adjustment - rev.5 June 2007 page 5/18

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Fig. 3: dis. 43482 f.2A+1

Section 4.2: Tilting adjustment - rev.5 June 2007 - Page 6/18

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.2.2 Potentiometer ends

During the movements of the axis by means of the Setup procedure,

the operator shall be responsible for possible damages caused by
wrong operations.

OT20s – OT20c models:

• Command the clockwise tilting up to reach the A value (+90° tilting angle) as shown in
the drawing 43482 f.1.
OT90s – OT90e models:
• Command a clockwise tilting up to reach the A value (+90° tilting angle) as shown in
the drawing dis. 43482 f.2+ pag.1.
OT30/90c - OT90ce models:
• Command a clockwise tilting up to reach the A value (+90°tilting angle) as shown in the
drawing dis. 43482 f.2A+pag6.

• Should not it be possible to reach the value indicated, you shall:

Enter the Setup modality (Section 1 page 2).
Select code 001 value 002
By means of the P44C push-button on the remote-keyboard, command the
movement until you reach the value indicated.
Press the P33 <Enter> push-button on the control panel in order to get the
acquisition of the new value applying to the positive end-of-stroke.

OT20s – OT20c models:

• Command the counter-clockwise tilting up to reach the B value (-30° tilting angle) as
shown in the drawing. 43482 f2A
OT30c models:
• Command the counter clockwise tilting up to reach the B value (+90° tilting angle) as
shown in the drawing dis. 43482 f.2A+ pag.6.

OT90s – OT90e models:

• Command the counter-clockwise tilting up to reach the B value (-90° tilting angle) as
shown in the drawing dis. 43482 f.2+ pag.1.
OT90c – OT90ce
• Command the counter-clockwise tilting up to reach the B value (- 90° tilting angle) as
shown in the drawing dis. 43482 f.2A+ pag.6.

• Should not it be possible to reach the value indicated, you shall:

Enter the Setup procedure (Section 1 page 2).
Select code 001 value 001.
By means of the P44A push-button on the remote-keyboard, command the
movement until you reach the value indicated.
Press the P33 <Enter> push-button on the control panel is order to get the
acquisition of the new value applying to the positive end-of-stroke.

1
The measures expressed in mm are approximated. In order to ensure a higher precision in the adjustment, make reference to the measures in degrees.
Section 4.2: Tilting adjustment - rev.5 June 2007 page 7/18
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

• Quit the Setup modality.

• Check that the tilting table function in set up to -30° for the OT30c versions
• Verify that the stops on the end-of-strokes +90°, [-90° [-30°] -18°], 0° are correct,
otherwise you shall repeat the procedure for the acquisition of the proper end-of-strokes.

The value applying to the horizontal stop is calculated by the software

controlling the equipment and does not require any adjustments.

1.2.3 Limitation of the tilting angle

Should not it be possible to reach the limits of ±90° due to possible

problems determined by the room dimensions, you can limit and acquire
the values of the end-of-stroke at ±5°, ±10°, ±20° o ±45°.

In this case, the procedure to be carried out is as follows:

• Limit the equipment movement to the chosen angle according to the procedure described in
par. 1.5 – page 14 Tilting Degree Limitation.
• Move the equipment to the chosen angle (acquisition tolerance ±1°).
• Through the Setup procedure (Section 1 page 2), you shall select code 001 and value 001
when the limitation is to be set for the negative side (-), or value 002 if the limitation is for
the positive side (+).
• Switch off the equipment and then switch it on again.
• Verify the proper stops onto the relevant ends-of-strokes.

Section 4.2: Tilting adjustment - rev.5 June 2007 - Page 8/18

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.2.4 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for modifying the value of an end-of-stroke is as
follows:
• Move the displacement concerned onto the end-of-stroke to be acquired.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display applying to the “layer height and tilting angle”
of the control panel will visualise 000).
• By means of P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons you shall select the
transmission movement concerned (this will be visualised on the “layer height” display).

TILTING code 001

• By means of P31 OR P66 (min. end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max. end of stroke)
push-buttons you can select the end-of-stroke to be modified (this will be visualised on
the “tilting angle” display).

-90° or -30° or –18° END-OF-STROKE value 001

+90° END-OF-STROKE value 002

• By means of the P44A push-button (left mobile area) and P44C push-button (right
mobile area) on the remote-keyboard, it will be possible to move the axis according to
your needs, if these push buttons are paired with P39 speed table movement will
increase.
• Press P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or P57 or P48(Reset) push-
button if you do not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value of 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.
• Stop position

1.2.5 Stop table position

Verify that the acquisition degrees correspond to what specified in the following table
O-T90s – O-T90e OT30c O-T20s – O-T20c
OT90c-OT90ce
Clockwise tilting +90° ±0.2° +90° ±0.2° +90° ±0.2°
Counter-clockwise tilting -90° ±0.2 -30° ±0.2 -18° ±0.2°
Horizontal tilting 0° ±0.2° 0° ±0.2° 0° ±0.2°

In case the angle limitation is set on, the quote will be the limitation angle selected ±0,2°.

Section 4.2: Tilting adjustment - rev.5 June 2007 page 9/18

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3 23S1 operation unit

1.3.1 Preliminary controls

The standard operation unit supplied is characterised by the following features:
Rated current and peak current delivered by the converter: corresponding to the size of the
operation unit B20/40 = 40A peak current 20A at return.
Reaction for tachymetric dynamo.

O-T90 models:
The operation unit is supplied with a standard RDT resistance (Tachymetric
Dynamo Resistance) on a 22kOhm 1% personalization socket (corresponding to
3000 RPM with 10v/1000RPM Tachymetric Dynamo).

O-T20 models:
The operation unit is supplied with a standard RDT resistance (Tachymetric
Dynamo Resistance) on a 32kOhm 1% personalization socket (corresponding
to 4000 RPM with 10v/1000RPM Tachymetric Dynamo).

It is reminded that the operation unit is equipped with an internal protection intervening in case of
lack of functioning of the Tachymetric Dynamo: in this case the motor and the linked electronic
devices will be protected against any lack of power. Anyway, this protection does not intervene
when the dynamo signal is present but a wrong RDT resistance was inserted.
The converter included in the standard configuration is supplied with the following welding points
being closed:

Standard closed points

You shall check that all the terminals are properly closed and shall execute
a visual inspection on the wiring of the operation unit/motor.
The clockwise rotation direction with positive speed reference is obtained
by respecting the proper polarities in the connections between motor and
tachymetric dynamo.
PAY ATTENTION TO THE POWER SUPPLY POLARITY!

Section 4.2: Tilting adjustment - rev.5 June 2007 - Page 10/18

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3.2 Adjustment trimmer and personalizations

1.3.3 Speed adjustment

The speed adjustment is executed by the PID software module: as a consequence the modification of the
speed through the “VEL” trimmer only and uniquely affects the dac voltage making it change, while the
effective time remains unchanged. The maximum DAC voltage is 10V, if you move to the maximum
speed, the DAC never have to reach this value. To leave a good adjustment margin to the PID, make
sure when you are using the digital voltmeter, that the DAC voltage between 25S1-TP1.Van3 and 25S1-
TP1.OV15, at the maximum axis speed, it will always stay below the 9V.
Execute the check on heavy load condition: mobile area (spot film device and stand group) at the
minimum end of stroke (foot side) for T20/30 versions and, at both end of stroke sides (foot and head
sides) for T90 versions.

VEL
Trimmer of adjustment of the max and min values of the speed range. By operating it clockwise
(cw) or counter-clockwise (ccw) you will respectively obtain a variation in the speed with a ±20%
range.

Section 4.2: Tilting adjustment - rev.5 June 2007 page 11/18

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3.4 Offset adjustment

These adjustments can be executed by qualified personnel only!

BIL
Offset adjustment. This trimmer allows the adjustment of possible offsets present in the input
reference (max correction of the reference value: ±200mV).
This converter is supplied with the speed adjustment already executed with tachymetric dynamo
reaction.

By means of the BIL trimmer, adjust where necessary for executing the
correction of possible offsets of the system. (The compensation, ± 200mV, is
realised on the input reference). The input reference being at 0 (zero), you shall
turn the trimmer until the motor is stopped.

The sequence of commands to be executed in order to correct possible offsets of the system is as
follows:
• Lead the tilting to 0°, move the column and SFD onto the rotation centre of the tilting,
FD at 1150mm (this situation avoids the intervention of the ceiling curve and I.I. curve
protections).
• Power ON and enter the Installation programme making sure to move the 25S3-Sw1.1
onto ON (the display of the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle”
will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
adjustment code of the transmission concerned (this will be visualised on the “Layer
height” display).

TILTING OPERATION ADJUSTMENT code 060

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (increase) and P32 OR P67 (decrease) push-buttons, you
shall select the value for the adjustment of the tilting operation offset.

OFFSET ADJUSTMENT value 001

• Press P57 or P48 (Reset) push-button if you do not want to confirm the above selection.

The operation is activated, the input reference is maintained to zero and the possible presence
of offset may determine the transmission movement.

• By means of a digital multimeter you shall check that the value of 0mV is present
between 23S9MVS1-3 and 23S9MVS1-4, otherwise you shall turn the “BIL” trimmer in
order to obtain such an adjustment.
• After completing the modification/adjustment procedure, press the P48 or P57(Reset)
push-button to leave the function.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.
Section 4.2: Tilting adjustment - rev.5 June 2007 - Page 12/18
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3.5 Gain and overshoot adjustment

These adjustments can be executed by qualified personnel only!

KV
This adjustment ensures the optimisation of the dynamic behaviour of the motor: turn this trimmer
clockwise in order to increase the gain of the PI “speed phase” error condition and thus obtaining a
higher rapidity and a better response.

DER
Derivative adjustment. Turn this trimmer clockwise in order to increase the derivative action
allowing the reduction of a possible overshoot present in the system.

Normally these adjustments are executed at the manufacturing plants and do not require any further
modifications, but only possible slight corrections to be realised by means of the KV and DER
trimmers.
The procedures to be followed for the dynamic adjustment must be executed with all the
equipment’s transmissions connected to the motor:
• Connect the probe of a “channel A” memory-oscilloscope to the 23S9MVS1-3
tachymetric dynamo’s signal (the probe mass must be connected to the 23S9MVS1-4
zero signal).
• Probe x 10, amplitude: ±2V
• Move the tilting to 0°: the column and the SFD must be centred and positioned on the
tilting rotation centre, FD at 1150mm (this condition avoids the intervention of the
ceiling curve and I.I. curve protections).
• Turn the ‘DER’ trimmer counter-clockwise.
• Make sure that possible alternative movements of the transmissions do not involve any
dangers.
• Power on: enter the installation programme and move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the
display of the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise
000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
adjustment code of the transmission concerned (this will be visualised on the “Layer
height” display).

TILTING OPERATION ADJUSTMENT code 060

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (decrease) and P32 OR P67 (increase) push-buttons, you
shall select the value for the adjustment of the tilting operation offset.

KV AND DER ADJUSTMENT value 002

• Press the P57 OR P48 (Reset) push-button if you do not want to confirm the above
selection.

Section 4.2: Tilting adjustment - rev.5 June 2007 page 13/18

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

The operation is activated, the input reference varies generating a low-frequency and low-
amplitude square- wave signal (0.5 Hz ±1V).
The tilting will alternately start moving around 0°.
Check the signals visualised by the oscilloscope by comparing them with
the wave-forms shown in Fig. 4 pag.14.
Adjust the KV gain and DER overshoot.

Low integral proportional gain

Increase the gain by turning the “KV”

trimmer clockwise up to obtain a response
similar to the response shown in this figure.

Turn the “DER” trimmer clockwise in order

to reduce the overshoot up to obtain a
response similar to the response shown in
figure.

Warning: do not exceed while adjusting the

gain since this could involve a useless heating
of the motor determined by the current
fluctuations. Make reference to what shown
in this figure to verify the existence of an
acceptable signal.
Fig. 4: Tilting motor signals

After completing the verification/adjustment procedure, press the P57 OR P48(Reset) push-button
to leave the function.
Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

Section 4.2: Tilting adjustment - rev.5 June 2007 - Page 14/18

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3.6 Acceleration time adjustment

ACC
The operation unit must have the acceleration function deactivated. (JP1 closed and JP2 and JP3
opened).

This function is not available. The acceleration adjustment is executed by

the software.

1.3.7 Peak current adjustment

You must verify that a RIP of 22kohm resistance is installed on the

personalization socket.
This resistance reduces the motor pickup current at 21A thus, it sefeguards
the motor against a possibile demagnetisation due to peaks current

.
The limitation of the peak current that can be delivered by the converter is
obtained by fitting a RIP resistance pin 5-10 on the personalization socket

Section 4.2: Tilting adjustment - rev.5 June 2007 page 15/18

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.4 3FC1 total safety

1.4.1 Total safety adjustment

This verification must be executed without any limitations of the tilting angle.
• Command a complete clockwise tilting up to the stop onto the +90° end of stroke.
• Enter the Setup modality (Section 1 page 2) and select code 001 and value 002.
• By means of the PP44C push-button of the remote keyboard, command the 0,5°
movement beyond the end of stroke. (For O-T20s – O-T20c the intervention of the end-
of-stroke safety is realised at 1° beyond the end-of-stroke ).
• Check that the 3Fc1 safety micro intervenes properly. Otherwise you shall adjust the
plate of the clockwise end of stroke so as to obtain the intervention of the 3Fc1 safety
micro.
• By means of P1 push-button on the I/O 25S3 board, you shall determine the release of
the safety intervention and by means of the PP44A push-button of the remote keyboard
you shall command the tilting movement within its functioning limits.
• Command a counter-clockwise tilting movement up to the stop onto the –90° or –20°
end of stroke.
• Enter the Setup modality (Section 1 page 2) and select code 001 and value 001.
• By means of the PP44A push-button of the remote keyboard command the 0.5°
movement beyond the end of stroke. (For O-T20s – O-T20c the intervention of the end-
of-stroke safety is realised at 1° beyond the end-of-stroke ).
• Check that the 3Fc1 safety micro intervenes properly. Otherwise you shall adjust the
plate of the counter-clockwise end of stroke so as to obtain the intervention of the 3Fc1
safety micro.
• By means of P1 push-button on the I/O 25S3 board, you shall determine the release of
the safety intervention and by means of the PP44C push-button of the remote keyboard
you shall command the tilting movement within its functioning limits.
•

PP44A PP44C

PP39

piastrine plates
-30° -90° +90° -20° +90°

P1 push-butt

3Fc1 3Fc1

Fig. 5: micro 3Fc1 Fig. 6: OT20s-c 3Fc1

Section 4.2: Tilting adjustment - rev.5 June 2007 - Page 16/18

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.5 Tilting degree limitation

O-T20 – O-T30 models:
The limitation of the tilting degrees allows to advance the tilting stop compared with the 90°
clockwise end-of-stroke and -20 or -30 counter clockwise end of stroke
O-T90 models:
The limitation of the tilting degrees allows to advance the tilting stop compared with the ±90° end-
of-strokes.

The limitation of the tilting degrees must be executed when the end-of-strokes have already
benn adjusted (please make reference to par 1.2.2 – Page 6 - Potentiometer ends).

1.5.1 Tilting limitation on the maximum end of stroke of +90°

The sequence of commands to be executed for limiting the tilting is as follows:
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of the control panel applying to the “layer
height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code concerned (this will be visualised on the “Layer height” display).
+90° TILTING LIMITATION code 013
• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons, you
shall select the wanted limitation angle (this will be visualised on the “Tilting angle”
display).

LIMITATION: +5° value 005

LIMITATION: +10° value 010
LIMITATION: +20° value 020
LIMITATION: +30° value 030
LIMITATION: +45° value 045
LIMITATION: +87° value 087
LIMITATION: +88° value 088
LIMITATION: +89° value 089
LIMITATION: +90° value 090

The values of +5° +10° +20° +30° and 45° are used in case the reverse of the
equipment is in use and in case of tilting limitation due to the small dimensions of the
room.
• Press the P33 (Enter) push-button in order to memorise the new value or P57 OR
P48(reset) push-button if you do not want to.
• In both cases the value visualised on the display of the control panel applying to the
“tilting angle” will set to the original value of 000 .
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

Section 4.2: Tilting adjustment - rev.5 June 2007 page 17/18

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.5.2 Tilting limitation on the minimum end of stroke of -90°

With the O-T20 models the only allowed limitation value is 005, 010
or 020 (this will be visualised on the display of the “tilting angle”).
Should it result to be possible to modify this selection, you shall verify
the installation configuration. With the T30 versions it is possible to set
all the limitation values but you must use only the value until 30° .

Valid for O-T90s - OT90e –OT90CS-OT90ce models:

The sequence of commands to be executed for limiting the tilting is as follows:
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of the control panel applying to the “layer
height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code concerned (this will be visualised on the “Layer height” display).

-90° TILTING LIMITATION code 012

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons, you
shall select the wanted limitation angle (this will be visualised on the “Tilting angle”
display).

LIMITATION: -5° value 005

LIMITATION: -10° value 010
LIMITATION: -20° value 020
APPLICABLE TO THE T30 VERSIONS
LIMITATION: -30° value 030
APPLICABLE TO THE T90 VERSIONS
LIMITATION: -45°° Value 045
LIMITATION: -87° value 087
LIMITATION: -88° value 088
LIMITATION: -89° value 089
LIMITATION: -90° value 090

• Press the P33 (Enter) push-button in order to memorise the new value or P57 OR
P48(reset) push-button if you do not want to.
• In both cases the value visualised on the display of the control panel applying to the
“tilting angle” will set to the original value of 000 .
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

With a configuration code 290 value 004 (O-T20c) and code 011 value
016-094-095-124-125-134-135 (I.I. dimensions 16”), the tilting
limitation onto the counter-clockwise end-of-stroke is automatically set
to 0° (zero degrees).

Section 4.2: Tilting adjustment - rev.5 June 2007 - Page 18/18

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Section 4.3: Tilting group elevation rev. 3 June 2007

1. Elevation (Only for the O-T90e – O-T90ce models)..................................................................2

1.1 Verification of the transmission movement direction..........................................................2
1.1.1 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 3Pt2 potentiometer ...............................................................................................................3
1.2.1 Position of the reference potentiometer .......................................................................................... 3
1.2.2 Potentiometer ends ......................................................................................................................... 6
1.2.3 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 7
1.2.4 Stop position ................................................................................................................................... 7
1.3 22S2 operation unit ..............................................................................................................8
1.3.1 Preliminary controls ....................................................................................................................... 8
1.3.2 Adjustment trimmer and personalizations ..................................................................................... 9
1.3.3 Speed adjustment ............................................................................................................................ 9
1.3.4 Offset adjustment .......................................................................................................................... 10
1.3.5 Gain and overshoot adjustment .................................................................................................... 11
1.3.6 Acceleration time adjustment........................................................................................................ 13
1.3.7 Peak current adjustment ............................................................................................................... 13
1.4 3FC2 safety ........................................................................................................................14
1.4.1 Total safety adjustment ................................................................................................................. 14

Note:

Added instructions for new CPU

Section 4.3: Tilting group elevation rev. 3 June 2007 page 1/14
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1. Elevation (Only for the O-T90e – O-T90ce models)

1.1 Verification of the transmission movement direction
During this phase the axis movements are free and not subject to the
software control.
Pay your best attention while moving the axis in this situation.
If you have to replace either the motor or tilting reduction gear and/or each time you have to remove
the potentiometer from its housing, it will be necessary to repeat the connection of the
potentiometer with the mechanical axis and then repeat again the acquisition of the to the end-of
stroke values.
Should you have to execute an adjustment, it will be necessary to carry out the following procedure.

1.1.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for verifying the elevation transmission is as follows:
• Enter the Setup modality (section 1 page 2) while moving the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the
display of the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise
000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the elevation transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer
height” display).
ELEVATION TRANSMISSION MOVEMENT code 002
• By means of P31 OR P66 (min. end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max. end of stroke)
push-buttons you can select the transmission movement (this will be visualised on the
“Tilting angle” display).
VERIFICATION OF THE MOVEMENT DIRECTION value 001
• By means of the remote keyboard, check that the P44B push-button commands the
upwards elevation and that P44D push-button commands the downwards movement. P67
increase the speed displacement.
• Otherwise, you shall inspect the wiring of the 3Mt2 motor (drawing 55169f.5+).
• Press P33 (Enter) push-button to confirm or P57 or P48 (Reset) push-button if you do
not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 to OFF to leave the Installation programme.
PP44B

PP67 PP44D

Section 4.3: Tilting group elevation rev. 3 June 2007 page2/14

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.2 3Pt2 potentiometer

1.2.1 Position of the reference potentiometer

Normally the reference potentiometer does not require any adjustments, unless it gets damaged
and/or must be replaced.
Should you have to execute any possible adjustments, you shall execute the following precedure:

• Move the table to the horizontal position, the elevation group must be placed to the C
value indicated in drawing fig.1: 43482 f.3/+.pag.4
• Switch off the equipment.
• Connect a digital multimeter between:

Valid for: CPU cod.55361 CPU cod.55973

Vcc probe: 25S1-TP2.INAN2 25S1-TP2.2A -INAN2A-
0Vprobe: 25S1-TP2.0V15 25S1-TP2.17/18A -0V15-

• Switch on the equipment.

• Verify that the voltage value that can be read on the multimeter is 5Vcc±0.05.
• Otherwise you shall:
slightly unloose the two socket-head screws fixing the support square of the
potentiometer.
Turn the potentiometer gear so as to get the proper reading.
Connect the potentiometer gear with the reduction unit gear.
Fix the support square again by means of the screws that were unloosen previously.

• After completing the whole procedure, you shall switch on the equipment and verify the
proper position of the potentiometer by executing the following operations:

Command an upwards elevation → the voltage on the multimeter shall increase.

Command a downwards movement → the voltage on the multimeter shall decrease.

Check the entire potentiometer gear connections stroke. The lack of

potentiometer gear connections backlash can cause the potentiometer
cursor mechanical wearing /breaking. On the other hand, too much
backlash can cause bad potentiometers functioning

Section 4.3: Tilting group elevation rev. 3 June 2007 page 3/14
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Figure 1: imm 43482f.3+

Section 4.3: Tilting group elevation rev. 3 June 2007 page4/14
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Figure 2:: Upwards end-of-stroke elevation

Figure 3:: Downwards end of stroke movement

Section 4.3: Tilting group elevation rev. 3 June 2007 page 5/14
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.2.2 Potentiometer ends

During the movements of the axis by means of the Setup procedure,

the operator shall be responsible for possible damages caused by
wrong operations.

• Command the upwards elevation in order to reach the A value indicated in drawing
Figure 1: imm 43482f.3+ and/or Figure 2 page 5.
• Should not it be possible to reach the value indicated you shall:
Enter the Setup modality (Section 1 page 2).
Select code 002 value 002.
By means of the PP44B push-button on the remote keyboard, command the
movement in order to reach the value indicated.
Press the P33 <ENTER> push-button of the control panel in order to get the
acquisition of the new value.

• Command a downwards movement in order to reach the B value indicated in drawing

Figure 1 page 4 and/or Figure 3 page 5.
• Should not it be possible to reach the value indicated you shall:
Enter the Setup modality (Section 1 page 2).
Select code 002 value 001
By means of the PP44D push-button on the remote keyboard, command the
movement in order to reach the value indicated.
Press the P33 <ENTER> push-button of the control panel in order to get the
acquisition of the new value.
• Quit the Setup modality.
• Verify that the stops onto the relevant end-of-strokes are correct.

The stand vertical position stop value is calculated by the equipment

software and doesn’t need any adjustment

PP44B
PP44A PP44C

PP39
PP44D

Section 4.3: Tilting group elevation rev. 3 June 2007 page6/14

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.2.3 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for modifying the value of an end-of-stroke is as
follows:
• Lead the movement concerned to the end-of-stroke to be acquired.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of the control panel applying to the “layer
height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) push-button and P35 (decrease) push-button you shall
select the code of the transmission concerned (this will be visualised on the “Layer
height” display).

ELEVATION code 002

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (min. end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max. end of stroke)
push-buttons you can select the end-of-stroke to be modified.

Minimum END OF STROKE value 001

Maximum END OF STROKE value 002

• Press the P44A (left mobile area) and P44C (right mobile area) push-buttons on the
remote-keyboard in order to move the axis as needed, combined with P67 push button the
displacement speed will increase.
• Press the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or P57 or P48(Reset) push-
button if you do not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value of 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the installation programme.

1.2.4 Stop position

Verify that the values of the end-of-stroke acquired correspond to what specified in the drawing
Figure 1: imm 43482f.3+ page 4
Value A ±1mm
Value B ±1mm

Section 4.3: Tilting group elevation rev. 3 June 2007 page 7/14
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3 22S2 operation unit

1.3.1 Preliminary controls

The standard operation unit supplied is characterised by the following features:
Rated current and peak current delivered by the converter: corresponding to the size of the
operation gear B20/40 = 40A peak current 20A at return.
Reaction for the tachymetric dynamo.

O-T90e – OT90ce models:

The operation is supplied with a standard RDT resistance on a 22kOhm
1% personalisation socket (corresponding to 3000 RPM with
10v/1000RPM Tachymetric Dynamo).

It is reminded that the operation unit is equipped with an internal protection intervening in case of
lack of functioning of the Tachymetric Dynamo: in this case the motor and the linked electronic
devices will be protected against any lack of power. Anyway, this protection does not intervene
when the dynamo signal is present but a wrong RDT resistance was inserted.
The converter included in the standard configuration is supplied with the following welding points
being closed:

Standard closed points

You shall check that all the terminals are properly closed and shall execute
a visual inspection on the wiring of the operation unit/motor.
The clockwise rotation direction with positive speed reference is obtained
by respecting the proper polarities in the connections between the motor
and the tachymetric dynamo.
PAY ATTENTION TO THE POWER SUPPLY POLARITY!

Section 4.3: Tilting group elevation rev. 3 June 2007 page8/14

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3.2 Adjustment trimmer and personalizations

1.3.3 Speed adjustment

The speed adjustment is executed by the PID software module: as a

consequence, the modification of the speed through the “VEL” trimmer
only and uniquely affects the dac voltage making it change, while the
effective time remains unchanged. The maximum DAC voltage is 10V, if
you move to the maximum speed, the DAC never have to reach this
value.To leave a good adjustment PID margin, make sure when you are
using the digital voltmeter, that the DAC voltage between 25S1-
TP1.Van4 and 25S1-TP1.OV15, at the maximun axis speed, it will
always stay below the 9V.Check in heavy load condition: Mobile area
(stand and spot film device) both end of stroke sides (foot and head side)

VEL
Trimmer of adjustment of the max and min values of the speed range. By operating it clockwise
(cw) or counter-clockwise (ccw) you will respectively obtain a variation in speed with a ± 20%
range.

Section 4.3: Tilting group elevation rev. 3 June 2007 page 9/14
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3.4 Offset adjustment

These adjustments can be executed by qualified personnel only!

BIL
Offset adjustment. This trimmer allows the adjustment of possible offsets present in the input
reference (max correction of the reference value: ±200mV).

This converter is supplied with the speed adjustment already executed with tachymetric dynamo
reaction.

By means of this trimmer, BIL, adjust where necessary for executing the
correction of possible offsets of the system. (The compensation, ± 200mV,
is realised on the input reference). The input reference being at 0 (zero),
you shall turn the trimmer until the motor is stopped.

The sequence of commands to be executed in order to correct possible offsets of the system is as
follows:
• Lead the tilting to 0°, move the column and SFD onto the rotation centre of the tilting,
FD at 1150mm (this situation avoids the intervention of the ceiling curve and I.I. curve
protections).
• Power ON and enter the Installation programme making sure to move the 25S3-Sw1.1
onto ON (the display of the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle”
will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
adjustment code of the transmission concerned (this will be visualised on the “Layer
height” display).

ELEVATION OPERATION ADJUSTMENT code 061

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (increase) and P32 OR P67 (decrease) push-buttons, you
shall select the value for the adjustment of the elevation operation offset.

OFFSET ADJUSTMENT value 001

• Press P57 OR 48(Reset) push-button if you do not want to confirm the above selection.
The operation is activated, the input reference is maintained to zero and the possible presence
of offset may determine the transmission movement.
• By means of a digital multimeter you shall check that the value of 0mV is present
between 23S9MVS2-3 and 23S9MVS2-4, otherwise you shall turn the “BIL” trimmer in
order to obtain such an adjustment.
• After completing the modification/adjustment procedure, press the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button to leave the function.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.

Section 4.3: Tilting group elevation rev. 3 June 2007 page10/14

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3.5 Gain and overshoot adjustment

These adjustments can be executed by qualified personnel only!

KV
This adjustment ensures the optimisation of the dynamic behaviour of the motor: turn this trimmer
clockwise in order to increase the gain of the error PI “speed phase” and thus obtaining a higher
rapidity and a better response.

DER
Derivative adjustment. Turn this trimmer clockwise in order to increase the derivative action
allowing the reduction of a possible overshoot present in the system.

Normally these adjustments are executed at the manufacturing plants and do nor require any further
modifications, but only possible slight corrections to be realised by means of the KV and DER
trimmers.
The procedures to be followed for the dynamic adjustment must be executed with all the
equipment’s transmissions connected to the motor:
• Connect the probe of a “channel A” memory-oscilloscope to the 23S9MVS2-3
tachymetric dynamo’s signal (the probe mass must be connected to the 23S9MVS2-4
zero signal).
• Probe per 10, amplitude: ±2V
• Move the tilting to 0°: the column and the SFD must be centred and positioned on the
tilting rotation centre, FD at 1150mm (this condition avoids the intervention of the
ceiling and I.I. curve protections).
• Turn the ‘Der’ trimmer counter-clockwise.
• Make sure that possible alternative movements of the transmissions do not involve any
dangers.

• Power on: enter the installation programme and move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the
display of the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise
000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
adjustment code of the transmission concerned (this will be visualised on the “Layer
height” display).

ELEVATION OPERATION ADJUSTMENT code 061

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (decrease) and P32 OR P67 (increase) push-buttons you
shall select the value for the adjustment of the elevation operation offset.

KV AND DER ADJUSTMENT value 002

Section 4.3: Tilting group elevation rev. 3 June 2007 page 11/14
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

• Press the P57 or P48 (Reset) push-button if you do not want to confirm the above
selection.

The operation is activated, the input reference varies generating a low-frequency and low-
amplitude square-wave signal (0.5 Hz ±1V).

The elevation movement will start moving alternately around the central
point of its excursion.
Check the signals visualised by the oscilloscope by comparing them with
the wave-forms shown in Fig. 4 page 12.
Adjust the KV gain and DER overshoot.

Low integral proportional gain

Increase the gain by turning the “KV”

trimmer clockwise up to obtain a response
similar to the response shown in this figure.

Turn the “DER” trimmer clockwise in order

to reduce the overshoot up to obtain a
response similar to the response shown in
figure.

Warning: do not exceed while adjusting the

gain since this could involve a useless heating
of the motor determined by the current
fluctuations. Make reference to what shown
in this figure to verify the existence of an
acceptable signal.
Fig. 1: Elevation motor signals

After completing the verification/adjustment procedure, press the P57 OR P48 (Reset) push-button
to leave the function.
Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

Section 4.3: Tilting group elevation rev. 3 June 2007 page12/14

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3.6 Acceleration time adjustment

ACC
The operation unit must have the acceleration function deactivated. (JP1 closed and JP2 and JP3
opened).

This function is not available. The acceleration adjustment is executed by

the software.

1.3.7 Peak current adjustment

You must verify that a RIP of 56kohm resistance is installed on the

personalization socket.
This resistance reduces the motor pickup current at 30A thus, it safeguards
the motor against a possible demagnetisation due to peaks current

The limitation of the peak current that can be delivered by the converter is
obtained by fitting a RIP resistance pin 5-10 on the personalization socket

Section 4.3: Tilting group elevation rev. 3 June 2007 page 13/14
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.4 3FC2 safety

1.4.1 Total safety adjustment

Ref.drawings Figure 1: imm 43482f.3+ pag.4.
• Command an upwards elevation up to the stop onto the end of stroke.
• Enter the Setup modality (Section 1 page 2) and select code 002 and value 002.
• By means of the PP44B push-button of the remote keyboard lead the movement 3mm
beyond the value of the end of stroke.
• Adjust the plate of the upper end of stroke so as to obtain the intervention of the 3Fc2
safety micro.
• By means of the P1 push-button of the I/O 25S3 board you shall determine the release of
the safety intervention and by means of the PP44D push-button of the remote keyboard
you shall command the elevation within its functioning limits.
• Quit the Setup procedure.
• Command the downwards movement up to the stop onto the end of stroke.
• Enter the Setup modality (Section 1 page 2) and select code 002 and value 001.
• By means of the PP44D push-button of the remote keyboard lead the movement 3mm
beyond this end of stroke.
• Adjust the plate of the lower end of stroke so as to obtain the intervention of the
3Fc2 safety micro.
• By means of the P1 push-button of the I/O 25S3 board you shall determine the release of
the safety intervention and by means of the PP44B of the push-button of the remote
keyboard you shall command the downwards movement within its function limits.

PP44B
PP44A PP44C

PP39
PP67 PP44D

tasto P1

Section 4.3: Tilting group elevation rev. 3 June 2007 page14/14

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Section 4.4: Stand adjustment rev. 5 November 2015

1. Stand ............................................................................................................................................ 2
1.1 Verification of the transmission movement direction ......................................................... 2
1.1.1 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 3Pt3 potentiometer ............................................................................................................... 3
1.2.1 Reference potentiometer position.................................................................................................... 3
1.2.2 Potentiometer ends ......................................................................................................................... 6
1.2.3 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 9
1.2.3.1 Stop position ................................................................................................................ 9
1.3 22S3 operation unit ........................................................................................................... 10
1.3.1 Preliminary controls ..................................................................................................................... 10
1.3.2 Adjustment trimmer and personalizations .................................................................................... 11
1.3.3 Speed adjustment .......................................................................................................................... 11
1.3.4 Offset adjustment .......................................................................................................................... 12
1.3.5 Gain and overshoot adjustment .................................................................................................... 13
1.3.6 Acceleration time adjustment ........................................................................................................ 15
1.3.7 Peak current adjustment ............................................................................................................... 15

Notes:
Added Adjustments for O-T20c
Added Adjustments for OT30/90c and OT90ce
Added instructions for new CPU
Added instructions for table with 180cm focal distance

The difference between the various models is realised through the software
configuration uniquely. You shall verify that the version is properly
configured and set (Section 3 - Paragraph 1.2 - Equipment configuration).
The Adjustment procedure is the same for the whole range of products of
the Opera Series.
The Opera table versions can have different table length and various SFD
types. Depending on such variable components, strokes and dimensions
can change (please make reference to Fig. 1 pag.4).

Section 4.4: Stand adjustment rev. 5 November 2015 page 1/16

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1. Stand
1.1 Verification of the transmission movement direction
During this phase the axis movements are free and not subject to the
software control.
Pay your best attention while moving the axis in this situation.

If you have to replace either the motor or the reduction gear of the stand and/or each time you have
to remove the potentiometer from its housing, it will be necessary to repeat the connection of the
potentiometer with the mechanical axis and then repeat again the acquisition of the ends-of-strokes
values.
Should you have to execute an adjustment, it will be necessary to carry out the following procedure:

1.1.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for verifying stand transmission direction is as follows:
• Enter the Setup modality (section 1 page 2) while moving the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the
display of the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise
000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the SFD transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).
STAND TRANSMISSION MOVEMENT code 003
• By means of P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max end of stroke) push-
buttons you can select the stand transmission movement (this will be visualised on the
“Tilting angle” display).

VERIFICATION OF THE MOVEMENT DIRECTION value 001

• By means of the remote keyboard, check that the P44A push-button commands the stand
leftwards movement and that P44C push-button commands the stand rightwards
movement, P39 increases displacement speed movement
• Otherwise, you shall inspect the wiring of the 3Mt3 motor (drawing 55169f.5+).
• Press P33 (Enter) push-button to confirm or P57 OR P48(Reset) push-button if you do
not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 to OFF to quit the Installation programme.
PP44A PP44C

PP39

Section 4.4: Stand adjustment rev. 5 November 2015 page 2 /16

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.2 3Pt3 potentiometer

1.2.1 Reference potentiometer position

Normally the reference potentiometer does not require any adjustments, unless it gets damaged
and/or must be replaced.

Should any possible adjustments be necessary, you shall execute the following procedure:

• Move the table to the horizontal position.

• Move the stand in order for it to be in the centered position compared with the
mechanical excursion, or the C value indicated in drawing dis.43482 f.4+ (Fig. 1
pag.4).
• Switch off the equipment.
• Connect a digital multimeter between:
Valid for: CPU cod.55361 CPU cod.55973
Vcc probe: 25S1-TP2.INAN3 25S1-TP2.3A -INAN3A-
0Vprobe: 25S1-TP2.0V15 25S1-TP2.17/18A -0V15-

• Switch on the equipment.

• Verify that the voltage value that can be read on the multimeter is 5Vcc±0.05.
• Otherwise you shall:
slightly unloose the two socket-head screws fixing the support square of the
potentiometer.
Turn the potentiometer gear so as to get the proper reading.
Connect the potentiometer gear with the reduction unit gear.
Fix the support square again by means of the screws that were unloosen previously.
• After completing the whole procedure, you shall switch on the equipment and verify the
proper position of the potentiometer by executing the following operations:
Command a rightwards angle → the voltage on the multimeter shall increase.
Command a leftwards angle → the voltage on the multimeter shall decrease.

Check the entire potentiometer gear connections stroke. The lack of

potentiometer gear connections backlash can cause the potentiometer
cursor mechanical wearing /breaking. On the other hand, too much
backlash can cause bad potentiometers functioning.

Section 4.4: Stand adjustment rev. 5 November 2015 page 3/16

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

STAND TRANSMISSION
SFD Tables SFD Tables
2400mm long and 150 focal distance 2100mm long and 150 focal distance
A 50mm±2 A 50mm±2
B 50mm±2 B 50mm±2
C 990mm±2 C 840mm±2
These values apply to the back bar and stand trolley without their relevant covers
In equipment version with the chain covering extended, the quotas can refer to the back rail and to the cover chain
roller width 35millimitre without proper carter. In this case the quotas A and B become (50-35) 15 millimetre
Fig. 1: dis.43482 f.4+

Section 4.4: Stand adjustment rev. 5 November 2015 page 4 /16

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Fig. 2: Stand carriage right end-of-stroke for 150 cm focal distance

Fig. 3: Stand carriage left end-of-stroke for 150 cm focal distance

Section 4.4: Stand adjustment rev. 5 November 2015 page 5/16
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

STAND TRANSMISSION
SFD Tables SFD Tables
2400mm long and 180 focal distance 2100mm long and 180 focal distance
A 12mm±2 A 12mm±2
B 12mm±2 B 12mm±2
C 952mm±2 C 802mm±2
These values apply to the back bar and the roller support for the cover of the 40mm wide chain located on the stand
trolley, without covers.
Fig. 4: dis.43482 f.4+

Section 4.4: Stand adjustment rev. 5 November 2015 page 6 /16

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Fig. 5: Stand carriage right end-of-stroke for 180 cm focal distance

Fig. 6: Stand carriage left end-of-stroke for 180 cm focal distance

Section 4.4: Stand adjustment rev. 5 November 2015 page 7/16

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.2.2 Potentiometer ends

During the movements of the axis by means of the Setup procedure,

the operator shall be responsible for possible damages caused by
wrong operations.

• Move the table to the horizontal position, the stand being in the centered position and the
Mobile Area onto the right end-of-stroke.
• Command a rightwards angle of the stand in order to reach the B value indicated in
drawing dis.43482 f.4+ (Fig. 1 pag.4 e/o Fig. 2 pag.5).
• Should not it be possible to reach the value indicated you shall:
Enter the Setup modality (Section 1 page 2)
Select code 003 value 002.
By means of the PP44C push-button on the remote keyboard, command the
movement up to get the indicated value.
Press the P33 <ENTER> push-button of the control panel in order to get the
acquisition of the new value.
• Move the table to the horizontal position, the stand being in the centered position and the
Mobile Area onto the left end-of-stroke.
• Command a leftwards angle of the stand in order to get the A value indicated in
drawing dis.43482 f.4+ (Fig. 1 pag.4 e/o Fig. 3 pag.5).
• Should not it be possible to get the value indicated you shall:
Enter the Setup modality (Section 1 page 2).
Select code 003 value 001.
By means of the PP44D push-button of the remote keyboard command the
movement up to get the indicated value.
Press the P33 <ENTER> push-button of the control panel in order to get the
acquisition of the new value.
• Quit the Setup modality.

The value of the stop in the vertical position is calculated by the

software controlling the equipment and does not need any adjustments.

• Verify that the stops onto both the right and left end-of-strokes are correct, otherwise
you shall repeat the acquisition of the end-of-stroke values.

When the axis is placed in ether the left or right end-

ATTENTION! of-stroke, the rubber protection gets squashed for
almost 1 cm.

Section 4.4: Stand adjustment rev. 5 November 2015 page 8 /16

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.2.3 Setup

The sequence of commands to be executed for modifying the value of an end-of-stroke is as

follows:
• Lead the movement concerned onto the end-of-stroke to be acquired.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of the control panel applying to the “layer
height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) push-button and P35 (decrease) push-button you shall
select the code of the transmission concerned (this will be visualised on the “Layer
height” display).

STAND Code 003

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max end of stroke)
push-buttons you can select the end-of-stroke to be modified.

Left END OF STROKE value 001

Right END OF STROKE value 002

• By means of the remote keyboard, press the P44A (left mobile area) and P44C (right
mobile area) push-buttons you can move the axis as needed., combined with P39 the
speed displacement movement will increase
• Press the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or P57 or P48(Reset) push-
button if you do not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value of 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the installation programme.

1.2.3.1 Stop position

Verify that the values of the end-of-stroke acquired correspond to what specified in the drawing
dis.43482 f.4+ pag.4:
Value A ±2mm
Value B ±2mm

Section 4.4: Stand adjustment rev. 5 November 2015 page 9/16

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3 22S3 operation unit

1.3.1 Preliminary controls

The standard operation unit supplied is characterised by the following features:

Rated current and peak current delivered by the converter: corresponding to the size of the
operation gear B20/40 = 40A peak current 20A at return.
Reaction for the tachymetric dynamo.

The operation is supplied with a RDT resistance on a 32kOhm 1%

personalisation socket (corresponding to 4000 RPM with 10v/1000RPM
Tachymetric Dynamo).

It is reminded that the operation unit is equipped with an internal protection intervening in case of
lack of functioning of the Tachymetric Dynamo: in this case the motor and the linked electronic
devices will be protected against any lack of power. Anyway, this protection does not intervene
when the dynamo signal is present but a wrong RDT resistance was inserted.
The converter included in the standard configuration is supplied with the following welding points
being closed:

Standard closed points

You shall check that all the terminals are properly closed and shall execute
a visual inspection on the wiring of the operation unit/motor.
The clockwise rotation direction with positive speed reference by
respecting the proper polarities in the connections between the motor and
the tachymetric dynamo.

PAY ATTENTION TO THE POWER SUPPLY POLARITY!

Section 4.4: Stand adjustment rev. 5 November 2015 page 10 /16

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3.2 Adjustment trimmer and personalizations

1.3.3 Speed adjustment

The speed adjustment is executed by the PID software module: as a

consequence, the modification of the speed through the “VEL” trimmer
only and uniquely affects the dac voltage making it change, while the
effective time remains unchanged. The maximum DAC voltage is 10V, if
you move to the maximum speed, the DAC never have to reach this
value. To leave a good adjustment PID margin, make sure when you
are using the digital voltmeter, that the DAC voltage between 25S1-
TP1.Van1 and 25S1-TP1.OV15, at the maximun axis speed, it will
always stay below the 9V. Check in heavy load condition: Tilting +90°
of mobile area (stand and spot film device) angle shot and tomography
with stand direction towards the minimum end of stroke (head side).
Tilting –90°, if possible, with stand direction towards the maximum end
of stroke (foot side)

VEL
Trimmer of adjustment of the max and min values of the speed range. By operating it clockwise
(cw) or counter-clockwise (ccw) you will respectively obtain a variation in speed with a ± 20%
range.
Section 4.4: Stand adjustment rev. 5 November 2015 page 11/16
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3.4 Offset adjustment

These adjustments can be executed by qualified personnel only!

BIL
Offset adjustment. This trimmer allows the adjustment of possible offsets present in the input
reference (max correction of the reference value: ±200mV).

This converter is supplied with the speed adjustment already executed with tachymetric dynamo
reaction.

By means of this trimmer, BIL, adjust where necessary for executing the
correction of possible offsets of the system. (The compensation, ± 200mV,
is realised on the input reference). The input reference being at 0 (zero),
you shall turn the trimmer until the motor is stopped.

The sequence of commands to be executed in order to correct possible offsets of the system is as
follows:
• Lead the tilting to 0°, move the column and SFD onto the rotation centre of the tilting,
FD at 1150mm (this situation avoids the intervention of the ceiling curve and I.I. curve
protections).
• Power ON and enter the Installation programme making sure to move the 25S3-Sw1.1
onto ON (the display of the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle”
will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
adjustment code of the transmission concerned (this will be visualised on the “Layer
height” display).

STAND OPERATION ADJUSTMENT code 062

By means of the P31 OR P66 (decrease) and P32 OR P67 (increase) push-buttons, you
•

shall select the value for the adjustment of the stand operation offset.
OFFSET ADJUSTMENT value 001
• Press the P57 OR P48(Reset) push button if you do not want to confirm the above
selection.

The operation is activated, the input reference is maintained to zero and the possible presence
of offset may determine the transmission movement.
• By means of a digital multimeter you shall check that the value of 0mV is present
between 23S9MVS3-3 and 23S9MVS3-4, otherwise you shall turn the “BIL” trimmer in
order to obtain such an adjustment.
• After completing the modification/adjustment procedure, press the P57 or P48(Reset)
push-button to quit the function.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.
Section 4.4: Stand adjustment rev. 5 November 2015 page 12 /16
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3.5 Gain and overshoot adjustment

These adjustments can be executed by qualified personnel only!

KV
This adjustment ensures the optimisation of the dynamic behaviour of the motor: turn this trimmer
clockwise in order to increase the gain of the “speed phase” PI error phase and thus obtaining a
higher rapidity and a better response.

DER
Derivative adjustment. Turn this trimmer clockwise in order to increase the derivative action
allowing the reduction of a possible overshoot present in the system.

Normally these adjustments are executed at the manufacturing plants and do nor require any further
modifications, but only possible slight corrections to be realised by means of the KV and DER
trimmers.
The procedures to be followed for the dynamic adjustment must be executed with all the
equipment’s transmissions connected to the motor:
• Connect the probe of a “channel A” memory-oscilloscope to the 23S9MVS3-3
tachymetric dynamo’s signal (the probe mass must be connected to the 23S9MVS3-4
zero signal).
• Probe x 10, amplitude: ±2V
• Move the tilting to 0°: the column and the SFD must be centred and positioned on the
tilting rotation centre, FD at 1150mm (this condition avoids the intervention of the
ceiling curve and I.I. curve protections).
• Turn the ‘Der’ trimmer counter-clockwise.
• Make sure that possible movements of the transmissions do not involve any dangers.

Power on: enter the installation programme and move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the
•

display of the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise
000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
adjustment code of the transmission concerned (this will be visualised on the “Layer
height” display).
STAND OPERATION ADJUSTMENT code 062
• By means of the P31 OR P66 (decrease) and P32 OR P67 (increase) push-buttons you
shall select the value for the adjustment of the stand operation offset.

KV AND DER ADJUSTMENT value 002

•Press the P57 or P48 (Reset) push-button if you do not want to confirm the above
selection.
The operation is activated, the input reference varies generating a low-frequency and low-
amplitude square wave-signal (0.5 Hz ±1V).

Section 4.4: Stand adjustment rev. 5 November 2015 page 13/16

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

The stand will start moving alternately around the value of 0°.
Check the signals visualised by the oscilloscope by comparing them with
the wave forms shown in Fig. 7: pag.14.
Adjust the KV gain and DER overshoot.

Low integral proportional gain

Increase the gain by turning the “KV”

trimmer clockwise up to obtain a response
similar to the response shown in this figure.

Turn the “DER” trimmer clockwise in order

to reduce the overshoot up to obtain a
response similar to the response shown in
figure.

Warning: do not exceed while adjusting the

gain since this could involve a useless heating
of the motor determined by the current
fluctuations. Make reference to what shown
in this figure to verify the existence of an
acceptable signal.
Fig. 7: Stand motor signals

After completing the verification/adjustment procedure, press the P57 or P48 (Reset) push-button
to quit the function.
Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.

Section 4.4: Stand adjustment rev. 5 November 2015 page 14 /16

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3.6 Acceleration time adjustment

ACC
The operation unit must have the acceleration function deactivated. (JP1 closed and JP2 and JP3
opened).

This function is not available. The acceleration adjustment is executed by

the software.

1.3.7 Peak current adjustment

With motoreductor RoK50 6F22CV cod.46176, do not install the RIP

resistance
40A motor peak current
With motoreductor of RoK50 3L42 cod. 43466A, you must verify that a
RIP of 56Kohm resistence is installed on the personalization socket.
This resistance reduces the motor pickup current at 30A thus, it sefeguards
the motor against a possibile demagnetisation due to peaks current

The limitation of the peak current that can be delivered by the converter is
obtained by fitting a RIP resistance pin 5-10 on the personalization socket

Section 4.4: Stand adjustment rev. 5 November 2015 page 15/16

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Blank page

Section 4.4: Stand adjustment rev. 5 November 2015 page 16 /16

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Section 4.5: spot film device adjustment - rev. 6 November 2015

1. Spot Film Device ......................................................................................................................... 2

1.1 Verification of the transmission movement direction .......................................................... 2
1.1.1 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 3Pt4 potentiometer ............................................................................................................... 3
1.2.1 Reference potentiometer position.................................................................................................... 3
1.2.2 Potentiometer ends ......................................................................................................................... 6
1.2.3 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 7
1.2.4 Stop position ................................................................................................................................... 7
1.3 23S4 Operation unit ............................................................................................................. 8
1.3.1 Preliminary controls ....................................................................................................................... 8
1.3.2 Adjustment trimmer and personalizations ...................................................................................... 9
1.3.3 Speed adjustment ............................................................................................................................ 9
1.3.4 Offset adjustment .......................................................................................................................... 10
1.3.5 Gain and overshoot adjustment .................................................................................................... 11
1.3.6 Acceleration time adjustment ........................................................................................................ 13
1.3.7 Peak current adjustment ............................................................................................................... 13

Notes:
Added adjustments applying to O-T20c
Added adjustments applying to O-T30/90c and OT90ce
Added instruction for new CPU
Added adjustments for Dira table
Added adjustments for Gastro table
Added adjustments for manual SFD

The difference between the various models is realised through the software
configuration uniquely. You shall verify that the version is properly
configured and set (Section 3 Chap. 1.2 - Equipment configuration).
The Adjustment procedure is the same for the whole range of products of
the table Series. The Opera table versions can have different table length
and various SFD types. Depending on such variable components, strokes
and dimensions can change (please make reference to Fig. 1 - page 4).

Section 4.5: spot film device adjustment - rev. 6 November 2015 - page 1/14
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1. Spot Film Device

1.1 Verification of the transmission movement direction
During this phase the axis movements are free and not subject to the
software control.
Pay your best attention while moving the axis in this situation.

If you have to replace either the motor or the reduction gear and/or each time you have to remove
the potentiometer from its housing, it will be necessary to repeat the connection of the
potentiometer with the mechanical axis and then repeat again the acquisition of the values applying
to the ends-of-strokes.
Should you have to execute an adjustment, it will be necessary to carry out the following procedure:

1.1.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for verifying the SFD transmission is as follows:
• Enter the Setup modality (section 1 page 2) while moving the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the
display of the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise
000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the stand transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).

SPOT FILM DEVICE TRANSMISSION MOVEMENT code 004

• By means of P31 or P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 or P67 (max end of stroke) push-
buttons you can select the SFD transmission movement (this will be visualised on the
“Tilting angle” display).

VERIFICATION OF THE MOVEMENT DIRECTION value 001

• By means of the remote keyboard, check that the P44A push-button commands the SFD
leftwards movement and that P44C push-button commands the SFD rightwards
movement, P39 increases the speed displacement movement
• Otherwise, you shall inspect the wiring of the 3Mt4 motor (drawing 55169f.7+).
• Press P33 (Enter) push-button to confirm or P57 OR P48 (Reset) push-button if you do
not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 to OFF to quit the Installation programme.

PP44A PP44C

PP39

Section 4.5: spot film device adjustment - rev. 6 November 2015 page 2/14
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.2 3Pt4 potentiometer

1.2.1 Reference potentiometer position

Normally the reference potentiometer does not require any adjustments, unless it gets damaged
and/or must be replaced.

Should you have to execute any possible adjustments, you shall carry out the following procedure:

• Move the table to the horizontal position.

• Move the SFD support in order to place it in the centered position compared with the
mechanical excursion, or C value indicated in Fig. 1 drawing dis.43482 f.5+ page 4.
• Switch off the equipment.
• Connect a digital multimeter between:

Valid for: CPU cod.55361 CPU cod.55973

Vcc probe: 25S1-TP2.INAN4 25S1-TP2.4A -INAN4A-
0Vprobe: 25S1-TP2.0V15 25S1-TP2.17/18A -0V15-

• Switch on the equipment.

• Verify that the voltage value that can be read on the multimeter is 5Vcc±0.05.
• Otherwise you shall:
slightly unloose the two socket-head screws fixing the support square of the
potentiometer.
Turn the potentiometer so as to get the proper reading.
Fix the support square again by means of the screws that were unloosen previously.
• After completing the whole procedure, you shall switch on the equipment and verify the
proper position of the potentiometer by executing the following operations:
Command the SFD rightwards movement → the voltage on the multimeter shall
increase.
Command the SFD leftwards movement → the voltage on the multimeter shall
decrease.

Check the entire potentiometer gear connections stroke. The lack of

potentiometer gear connections backlash can cause the potentiometer
cursor mechanical wearing /breaking. On the other hand, too much
backlash can cause bad potentiometers functioning

Section 4.5: spot film device adjustment - rev. 6 November 2015 - page 3/14
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

SFD TRANSMISSION
SFD Tables SFD Tables SFD Table SFD Table
2400mm long 2100mm long Dira Gastro
55mm±2 55mm±2 57mm±2 27mm±2
A(*) A(*) A(*) A
215mm±2 215mm±2 197mm±2 /
55mm±2 55mm±2 57mm±2 27mm±2
B(**) B(**) B(**) B
215mm±2 215mm±2 197mm±2 /
C 825mm±2 C 675mm±2 C 727mm±2 C 710mm±2
Manual SFD Manual SFD
Tables Tables
2400mm long 2100mm long
51mm±2 51mm±2
A(*) A(*)
186mm±2 186mm±2
51mm±2 51mm±2
B(**) B(**)
186mm±2 186mm±2
C 856mm±2 C 706mm±2

The quotes apply to values measured from internal head to the frame of the SFD without cover
(*)
With the option longitudinal tabletop (code 289 value 001) the quote A is increased of 160mm or 140mm
related to the equipment version.
(**)
With the option longitudinal tabletop (code 289 value 002) the quote B is increased of 160mm or 140mm
related to the equipment version.

Fig. 1: dis. 43482 f.5+

Code 289 is used to determine whether the transmission of the longitudinal tabletop
is mounted on the foot-side (value 001) or on the head-side (value 002). The SFD
excursion is limited according to the transmission mounting position.
Section 4.5: spot film device adjustment - rev. 6 November 2015 page 4/14
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Fig. 2: SFD left end of stroke

Fig. 3: SFD right end of stroke

Section 4.5: spot film device adjustment - rev. 6 November 2015 - page 5/14
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.2.2 Potentiometer ends

During the movements of the axis by means of the Setup procedure,
the operator shall be responsible for possible damages caused by
wrong operations.

• Move the table to the horizontal position.

• Command a rightwards movement of the SFD-Stand group in order to reach the B value
indicated in drawing dis.43482 f.2+ (Fig. 1 pag.4 e/o Fig. 2 pag.5).
• Should not it be possible to get the value indicated you shall
Enter the Setup modality (Section 1 page 2)
Select code 003 value 002.
By means of the PP44C push-button on the remote keyboard, command the
movement up to get the indicated value.
Press the P33 <ENTER> push-button of the control panel in order to get the
acquisition of the new value.
• Command a leftwards movement of the SFD-Stand group in order to reach the A value
indicated in drawing dis.43482 f.2+ (Fig. 1 pag.4 e/o Fig. 3 pag.5).
• Should not it be possible to reach the value indicated you shall
Enter the Setup modality (Section 1 page 2).
Select code 003 value 001.
By means of the PP44B push-button of the remote keyboard command the
movement up to get the indicated value.
Press the P33 <ENTER> push-button of the control panel in order to get the
acquisition of the new value.
• Quit the Setup modality.
• Verify that the stops onto both the right and left end-of-strokes are correct, otherwise
you shall repeat the acquisition of the end-of-stroke values.

When the axis is placed in ether the left or right end-of-stroke, the rubber
protection gets squashed for almost 1 cm.

Section 4.5: spot film device adjustment - rev. 6 November 2015 page 6/14
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.2.3 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for modifying the value of an end-of-stroke is as
follows:
• Lead the movement concerned to the end-of-stroke to be acquired.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of the control panel applying to the “layer
height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) push-button and P35 (decrease) push-button you shall
select the code of the transmission concerned (this will be visualised on the “Layer
height” display).

SPOT FILM DEVICE code 004

• By means of the P31 OR P66 OR P66(min end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 OR P67 (max
end of stroke) push-buttons you can select the end-of-stroke to be modified.

Minimum END OF STROKE value 001

Maximum END OF STROKE value 002

• By means of the remote keyboard, press the P44A (leftwards mobile area) and P44C
(rightwards mobile area) push-buttons you can move the axis as needed, combined with
P39 the speed displacement movement will increase.
• Press the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or P57 or P48(Reset) push-
button if you do not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value of 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the installation programme.

1.2.4 Stop position

Verify that the values of the ends-of-strokes acquired correspond to what specified in drawing dis.
43482 f.5+ pag.4:
Value A ±2mm
Value B ±2mm

Section 4.5: spot film device adjustment - rev. 6 November 2015 - page 7/14
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3 23S4 Operation unit

1.3.1 Preliminary controls

The standard operation unit supplied is characterised by the following features:
Rated current and peak current delivered by the converter: corresponding to the size of the
operation gear B14/28 = 28A peak current 14A at return.
Reaction for the tachymetric dynamo.

The operation is supplied with RDT resistance on a 22kOhm 1%

personalisation socket (corresponding to 3000 RPM with 10v/1000RPM
Tachymetric Dynamo).

It is reminded that the operation unit is equipped with an internal protection intervening in case of
lack of functioning of the Tachymetric Dynamo: in this case the motor and the linked electronic
devices will be protected against any lack of power. Anyway, this protection does not intervene
when the dynamo signal is present but a wrong RDT resistance was inserted.
The converter included in the standard configuration is supplied with the following welding points
being closed:

Standard closed points

You shall check that all the terminals are properly closed and shall execute
a visual inspection on the wiring of the operation unit/motor.
The clockwise rotation direction with positive speed reference is obtained
by respecting the proper polarities in the connections between the motor
and the tachymetric dynamo.

PAY ATTENTION TO THE POWER SUPPLY POLARITY!

Section 4.5: spot film device adjustment - rev. 6 November 2015 page 8/14
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3.2 Adjustment trimmer and personalizations

1.3.3 Speed adjustment

The speed adjustment is executed by the PID software module: as a

consequence, the modification of the speed through the “VEL” trimmer
only and uniquely affects the dac voltage making it change, while the
effective time remains unchanged. The maximum DAC voltage is 10V, if
you move to the maximum speed, the DAC never have to reach this
value. To leave a good adjustment PID margin, make sure when you
are using the digital voltmeter, that the DAC voltage between 25S1-
TP1.Van2 and 25S1-TP1.OV15, at the maximun axis speed, it will
allawys stay below the 9V. Check in heavy load condition: Tilting +90°
of mobile area (stand and spot film device) angle shot and tomography
with stand direction towards the minimum end of stroke (head side).
Tilting –90°, if possible, with stand direction towards the maximum end
of stroke (foot side)

VEL Trimmer of adjustment of the max and min values of the speed range. By operating it
clockwise (cw) or counter-clockwise (ccw) you will respectively obtain a variation in speed with a
± 20% range.
Section 4.5: spot film device adjustment - rev. 6 November 2015 - page 9/14
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3.4 Offset adjustment

These adjustments can be executed by qualified personnel only!

BIL
This adjustment ensures the optimisation of possible offsets present in the input reference (max
correction of the reference value ± 200mV.
The converter is supplied with the speed adjustment already executed for reaction with tachymetric
dynamo.

By this trimmer, BIL, adjust where necessary for executing the correction
of possible offsets of the system. (The compensation, ± 200mV, is realised
on the input reference). The input reference being at 0 (zero), you shall
turn the trimmer until the motor is stopped.

The sequence of commands to be executed in order to correct possible offsets of the system is as
follows:
• Lead the tilting to 0°, move the column and SFD onto the rotation centre of the tilting,
FD at 1150mm (this situation avoids the intervention of the ceiling curve and I.I. curve
protections).
• Power ON and enter the Installation programme making sure to move the 25S3-Sw1.1
onto ON (the display of the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle”
will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
adjustment code of the transmission concerned (this will be visualised on the “Layer
height” display).

SPOT FILM DEVICE OPERATION ADJUSTMENT code 063

• By means of the P31 OR P66 OR P66(decrease) and P32 OR P67 OR P67 (increase)
push-buttons, you shall select the value for the adjustment of the SFD operation offset.

OFFSET ADJUSTMENT value 001

• Press the P48 (Reset) push button if you do not want to confirm the above selection.
The operation is activated, the input reference is maintained to zero and the possible presence
of offset may determine the transmission movement.
• By means of a digital multimeter you shall check that the value of 0mV is present
between 23S9MVS4-3 and 23S9MVS4-4, otherwise you shall turn the “Bil” trimmer in
order to obtain such an adjustment.
• After completing the modification/adjustment procedure, press the P57 OR P48 (Reset)
push-button to quit the function.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.

Section 4.5: spot film device adjustment - rev. 6 November 2015 page 10/14
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3.5 Gain and overshoot adjustment

These adjustments can be executed by qualified personnel only!

KV
This adjustment ensures the optimisation of the dynamic behaviour of the motor: turn this trimmer
clockwise in order to increase the gain of the “speed phase” PI error phase and thus obtaining a
higher rapidity and a better response.

DER
Derivative adjustment. Turn this trimmer clockwise in order to increase the derivative action
allowing the reduction of a possible overshoot present in the system.
Normally these adjustments are executed at the manufacturing plants and do nor require any further
modifications, but only possible slight corrections to be realised by means of the KV and DER
trimmers.
The procedures to be followed for the dynamic adjustment must be executed with all the
equipment’s transmissions connected to the motor:
• Connect the probe of a “channel A” memory-oscilloscope to the 23S9MVS4-3
tachymetric dynamo’s signal (the probe mass must be connected to the 23S9MVS4-4
zero signal).
• Probe x 10, amplitude: ±2V/cm
• Move the tilting to 0°: the column and the SFD must be centred and positioned on the
tilting rotation centre, FD at 1150mm (this condition avoids the intervention of the
ceiling curve and I.I. curve protections).
• Turn the ‘Der’ trimmer counter-clockwise.
• Make sure that possible alternative movements of the transmissions do not involve any
dangers.
• Power on: enter the installation programme and move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the
display of the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise
000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
adjustment code of the transmission concerned (this will be visualised on the “Layer
height” display).

SPOT FILM DEVICE OPERATION ADJUSTMENT code 063

• By means of the P31 OR P66 OR P66(decrease) and P32 OR P67 OR P67 (increase)
push-buttons you shall select the value for the adjustment of the SFD operation offset.

KV AND DER ADJUSTMENT value 002

• Press the P57 or P48(Reset) push-button if you do not want to confirm the above
selection.

The operation is activated, the input reference varies generating a low-frequency and low-
amplitude square-wave signal (0.5 Hz ±1V).

Section 4.5: spot film device adjustment - rev. 6 November 2015 - page 11/14
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

The stand will start moving alternately around the value of 0°.
Check the signals visualised by the oscilloscope by comparing them with
the wave-forms indicated in Fig. 4: pag.12.
Adjust the KV gain and DER overshoot.

Low integral proportional gain

Increase the gain by turning the “KV”

trimmer clockwise up to obtain a response
similar to the response shown in this figure.

Turn the “DER” trimmer clockwise in order

to reduce the overshoot up to obtain a
response similar to the response shown in
figure.

Warning: do not exceed while adjusting the

gain since this could involve a useless heating
of the motor determined by the current
fluctuations. Make reference to what shown
in this figure to verify the existence of an
acceptable signal.
Fig. 4: SFD motor signals

After completing the verification/adjustment procedure, press the P57 OR P48(Reset) push-button
to quit the function.
Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.

Section 4.5: spot film device adjustment - rev. 6 November 2015 page 12/14
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3.6 Acceleration time adjustment

ACC
The oepration unit must have the acceleration time function deactivated (JP1 closed and JP2 and
JP3 opened).

This function is not available. The acceleration adjustment is executed by

the software.

1.3.7 Peak current adjustment

With motor reductor RoK40 3L42MOR.. cod.45287, you must verify if a

RIP of 56Kohm is installed on the personalization socket.
This resistance reduces to 30A the motor peak current and save the motor
to demagnetization due to current peaks
With motor reductor RoK40 3M32 cod.43468, you must verify if a RIP of
27Kohm is installed on the personalization socket.
This resistance reduces the motor pickup current at 16,5A thus, it safe
guards the motor against a possible demagnetisation due to peaks current

The limitation of the peak current that can be delivered by the converter is
obtained by fitting a RIP resistance pin 5-10 on the personalization socket

Section 4.5: spot film device adjustment - rev. 6 November 2015 - page 13/14
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Blank page

Section 4.5: spot film device adjustment - rev. 6 November 2015 page 14/14
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Section 4.6: Preliminary tomographic controls - rev. 4 November 2019

1. Preliminary tomographic controls ................................................................................................ 2

1.1 Tomography speed adjustment ............................................................................................ 2
1.1.1 Stand speed ...................................................................................................................... 2
1.1.2 SFD speed ........................................................................................................................ 2
1.2 X-ray timing adjustment in Tomography............................................................................. 3
1.3 Setup in Tomography ........................................................................................................... 5
1.4 X-ray phasing adjustment in tomosynthesis ........................................................................ 8
1.4.1 Tomosynthesis setup ........................................................................................................ 8

Notes:
Added directions for new CPU

Section 4.6: Preliminary tomographic controls - rev. 4 November 2019 - page 1/10
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1. Preliminary tomographic controls

An inadequate offset adjustment may determine differences in the

layer-heights among tomographies having same parameters but
opposite directions.
Before starting the adjustment applying to the tomography speed, it is necessary to execute the
adjustments of the offsets applying to the operation gears according to the procedures specified in
section 4.4 par.1.3.4 (23Az3 - stand displacement) and section 4.5 par.1.3.4 (23Az4 – SFD
displacement).
1.1 Tomography speed adjustment


It is necessary to execute the adjustment of both stand speed and SFD
speed and these adjustments must be further verified with X-ray emission.

1.1.1 Stand speed

Adjust the stand speed in order to have a time of 1.3 sec. with tomography parameters of
40°/1.25s.

Oscilloscope: Philips PM 3335:

probe x 10, time base: 0.2 sec/cm, amplitude: 2 V/cm
channel A:
probe: 25S1-TP1-1 (VAN1) stand dac signal
0v: 25S1-TP1-13/14 0V15
• Move the table to the horizontal position and the mobile area centered compared with the
table.
• Move the 25S3-SW1-2 onto ON in order to deactivate the intervention of the allarmax
device that intervenes if, during the verification, the stand speed and SFD speed are
excessively dephased.
• Select a 40° tomography.
• Execute a tomography (without X-rays).
• Verify that the rectilinear segment of the wave form corresponds to 1.3 sec  0.05.

Should it be necessary to modify the speed, you shall adjust the VEL potentiometer of the 23Az3
operation unit (turn it clockwise to increase the speed, turn it counter-clockwise to decrease it).

1.1.2 SFD speed

Adjust the Spot-film-device speed so as to get the same positions in Preparation and Tomography.
Instrument: digital multimeter in Vcc, as a reference signal spot film device potentiometer

Valid for: CPU cod.55361 CPU cod.55973

Vcc probe: 25S1-TP2.4 (IN-AN4) 25S1-TP2..4A -INAN4A-
0Vprobe: 25S1-TP2.13 (0V15) 25S1-TP2.17/18A -0V15-

Section 4.6: Preliminary tomographic controls - rev. 4 November 2019 - page 2/10
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

• Enter the Installation and check that the value of 005 is selected on both code 049 and
code 050.
• Move the table to the horizontal position and the mobile area onto the left end of stroke.
• Select a 40° tomography and layer height at 330 mm.
• Execute a Preparation: keep the Preparation push-button pressed and wait until the
reading on the digital multimeter is settled; you can now read the voltage of the 3Pt4
potentiometer.
• Execute two tomographies without X-rays and, while keeping the radiography push-
button pressed, wait until the reading of the second tomography on the digital
multimeter is settled: read the voltage of the 3Pt4 potentiometer.
• The difference between this reading and the reading of Preparation must be of 5 mVcc.
• Should this difference be lower than 5 mV, you shall turn the Vel potentiometer
clockwise (the speed will increase).
• Should the difference be higher than a 5 mV, you shall turn the Vel potentiometer
counter-clockwise (the speed will decrease).
• Repeat the two tomographies and adjust the speed so as to obtain a difference of 5mV
between the reading in Tomography and the reading in Preparation.
• After completing the adjustment procedure, disconnect the 25S3-SW1-2 allarmax
device.

Note that it will always be necessary to execute the final control with the X-ray emission,
independently from the tomography adjustment method you have adopted.

1.2 X-ray timing adjustment in Tomography

The following settings involve the emission of X-rays. Take adequate

precautions to ensure that no one and no part of the body is directly or
indirectly exposed to radiation.

Before adjusting the X-ray phasing in tomography, check that the X-

ray tube alignments with the detector are correct and that the end-of-
stroke are set correctly.
Never exceed the maximum allowable tolerance (2% DFF, where
DFF stands for focal distance).
Incorrect adjustment of the layer causes incorrect dose and exposure.

By means of the Setup procedure (Section 1 page 2), adjust the output of the X-ray command to the
generator in order for the X-ray emission to realise when the displacement is moving at a constant
speed. It is to be noted that the precision of the tomographic angle depends on the precision and
care of this adjustment.

Oscilloscope: Philips PM 3335

probe x 10, time base: 0.5 sec/cm, amplitude: 1 V/cm
channel A: probe 25S1-TP1-1 (VAN1) Stand dac signal
0v: 25S1-TP1-13/14 0V15
channel B: time of real Kv value of the generator
Section 4.6: Preliminary tomographic controls - rev. 4 November 2019 - page 3/10
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

(for OPERA G – 1S2 Tp7 feedback Kv)

0v: 0V15

• Select a 40° tomography, 1.25sec on the SFD.

• Execute a tomography
• Check the deviation in mSec between the movement path and the X-ray emission.
• Correct the deviation according to the procedure specified in the Setup procedure
(Section 1 page 2).

At present the acceleration times in tomography are the same for all the angles/times, this is
why the correction value on the film of any angle/time can be filed, after the relevant
verification, for all the other corrections on the film. In the like manner, the correction value
in DFR of an angle/time can be filed, after the verification, for all the other corrections in
DFR.

Section 4.6: Preliminary tomographic controls - rev. 4 November 2019 - page 4/10
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3 Setup in Tomography

The sequence of commands applying to the X-ray timing is as follows:
• Measure the deviation in mSec between the movement path and the X-ray emission.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON ( the display of the control panel applying to “Layer height
and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-button, select the code corresponding
to the tomography angle correction (this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

STANDARD TOMOGRAPHY
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 8°/0.4sec ON FILM (1) code 037
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 8°/0.8sec ON FILM (1) code 038
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 20°/0.6sec ON FILM (1) code 039
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 20°/1.2sec ON FILM (1) code 040
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 40°/1.2sec ON FILM (1) code 041
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 40°/2.5sec ON FILM (1) code 042
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 8°/0.4sec IN DFR code 043
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 8°/0.8sec IN DFR code 044
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 20°/0.6sec IN DFR code 045
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 20°/1.2sec IN DFR code 046
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 40°/1.2sec IN DFR code 047
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 40°/2.5sec IN DFR code 048
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 30°/1,2sec ON FILM code 088
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 30°/2,5sec ON FILM code 089
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 30°/1,2sec IN DFR code 090
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 30°/2,5sec IN DFR code 091
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 5°/0,4sec ON FILM code 098
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 5°/0,8sec ON FILM code 099
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 5°/0,4sec IN DFR code 100
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 5°/0,8sec IN DFR code 101

FIXED ANGLE TOMOGRAPHY

TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 8°/0,6sec ON FILM (1) code 037
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 8°/1,2sec ON FILM (1) code 038
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 20°/0,9sec ON FILM (1) code 039
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 20°/1,8sec ON FILM (1) code 040
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 40°/1,8sec ON FILM (1) code 041
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 40°/3,7sec ON FILM (1) code 042
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 8°/0,6sec IN DFR code 043
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 8°/1,2sec IN DFR code 044
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 20°/0,9sec IN DFR code 045
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 20°/1,8sec IN DFR code 046
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 40°/1,8sec IN DFR code 047

______________________________
1
Correction valid for tables with SFD

Section 4.6: Preliminary tomographic controls - rev. 4 November 2019 - page 5/10
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 40°/3,7sec IN DFR code 048

TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 30°/1,8sec ON FILM code 088
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 30°/3,7sec ON FILM code 089
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 30°/1,8sec IN DFR code 090
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 30°/3,7sec IN DFR code 091
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 50°/2,2sec ON FILM code 093
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 50°/4,7sec ON FILM code 094
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 50°/2,2sec IN DFR code 095
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 50°/4,7sec IN DFR code 096
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 10÷50°/Xsec ON FILM code 098
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 10÷50°/Xsec ON FILM code 099
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 10÷50°/Xsec IN DFR code 100
TOMOGRAPHY CORRECTION 10÷50°/Xsec IN DFR code 101

X time for FREE angles depends on the set angle and ranges between 0,7 and 2,4 sec for high speed
and between 1,5 and 4,7 for low speed.

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons,
select the value of correction of the X-ray starting time: each number corresponds to
10msec compared with the value of 0 (this will be visualised on the “tilting angle”
display).
• Press the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value of 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.

Example: if the value 001 is selected and no correction of the time occurs, thus determining
the X-ray emission command at the starting of the tomography, you can select the value 050
and a 500msec-delay of the X-ray command will be realised compared with the signal of the
dynamo of the stand.

Section 4.6: Preliminary tomographic controls - rev. 4 November 2019 - page 6/10
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

D C E

A : Stand dynamo signal

B : X-ray signal from the generator
C : Beginning of the X-ray emission with correction 050
D : Beginning of the X-ray emission with correction 001
E : Beginning of the X-ray emission with correction 090

Section 4.6: Preliminary tomographic controls - rev. 4 November 2019 - page 7/10
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.4 X-ray phasing adjustment in tomosynthesis

The following settings involve the emission of X-rays. Take adequate

precautions to ensure that no one and no part of the body is directly or
indirectly exposed to radiation.

Before adjusting the X-RAY phasing in tomography, check that the

detector-X-ray tube alignments are correct and that the limit switches
are set correctly.
Never exceed the maximum permissible tolerance (2% of DFF, where
DFF stands for focal distance).
Incorrect adjustment of the layer causes incorrect dose and exposure.

Using the Setup procedure (Sect. 1 page 2), adjust the X-ray command output to the generator so
that X-ray emission occurs when the movement has a constant speed.
The accuracy of this calibration depends on the accuracy of the angle in tomosynthesis.

Philips oscilloscope PM 3335

probe x 10, time basis: 0,5 sec/cm, width: 1 V/cm
channel A: probe: 25S1-TP1-1 (VAN1) stand DAC signal
0v: 25S1-TP1-13/14 0V15
channel B: time actual generator Kv (for OPERA G – 1S2 Tp7 feddback Kv)
0v: 0V15

• Select tomosynthesis 40° 7,5sec on digital system.

• Perform a tomosynthesis.
• Check the offset in mSec between movement trajectory and X-ray step.
• Using the Setup procedure (Sec.1 page 2), adjust the offset

Currently, the ramp times in tomosynthesis are the same for all angles/times, so the DFR correction
value of an angle/time, after verification, can be carried over for all DFR corrections (See Setup in
Tomosynthesis).

1.4.1 Tomosynthesis setup

The command sequence for X-ray phasing is as follows:
Section 4.6: Preliminary tomographic controls - rev. 4 November 2019 - page 8/10
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

• Measure the deviation in mSec between the motion trajectory and X-ray step
• Set 25S3-Sw1.1 to ON (the "layer and tilt angle" display on the console shows 000)
• Use the P34 (increment) and P35 (decrement) keys to select the tomosynthesis angle
adjustment code (this is shown on the "layer" display)

TOMOSYNTHESIS ADJUSTMENT 5°/0,9sec IN DFR (2) code 037

TOMOSYNTHESIS ADJUSTMENT 8°/1,5sec IN DFR (2) code 038
TOMOSYNTHESIS ADJUSTMENT 20°/3,75sec IN DFR (2) code 039
TOMOSYNTHESIS ADJUSTMENT 30°/5,6sec IN DFR (2) code 040
TOMOSYNTHESIS ADJUSTMENT 40°/7,5sec IN DFR (2) code 041
TOMOSYNTHESIS ADJUSTMENT 50°/9,4sec IN DFR (2) code 042

• Use P31 or P66 (backward) and P32 or P67 (forward) buttons to select the X-ray start
time adjustment value. Each number corresponds to 10msec from 0 (the display shows
"tilt angle").
• Choose the P33 (Enter) button to store the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset) buttons if
you wish to cancel.
• In both cases, the value shown on the "tilt angle" display will reset to the value 000 when
the button is pressed and to the last value stored when it is released.
• Turn 25S3-Sw1.1 to OFF to exit installation.

E.g., if with value 001 there is no time adjustment, and therefore the X-ray command is given at the
same time as the start of the tomosynthesis, by setting value 050 there will be a delay of 500msec in
the X-ray command, with respect to the signal from the dynamo of the stand.

____________________________________
2
Correction valid for tables with dynamic detector

Section 4.6: Preliminary tomographic controls - rev. 4 November 2019 - page 9/10
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

D C E

A : stand dynamo signal

B : X-ray signal from generator
C : X-ray step start with 050 adjustment
D : X-ray step start with 001 adjustment
E : X-ray step start with 090 adjustment

Section 4.6: Preliminary tomographic controls - rev. 4 November 2019 - page 10/10
OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

Section 4.7: Tomographic controls - rev. 2 November 2019

1. Tomographic controls .................................................................................................................. 2

1.1 Verification of the tomography by means of X-ray emission .............................................. 2
1.2 Tomography fine adjustment in Setup ................................................................................. 2
1.3 Automatic increase in tomography ...................................................................................... 4
1.3.1 Tomography automatic increase selection ....................................................................... 4
1.3.2 Verification of the tomographic automatic increase ........................................................ 4
1.4 Verification of the tomosynthesis by means of X-ray emission .......................................... 5
1.5 Fine tomosynthesis adjustment in Setup .............................................................................. 5

Notes:

Section 4.7: Tomographic controls - rev. 2 November 2019 page 1/6

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1. Tomographic controls

The following adjustments require X-ray emission. You shall take

adequate precautions in order to prevent anyone and any part of your
body from being directly or indirectly exposed to X-ray emissions.

Before adjusting the tomography layer, check that the detector-X-ray

tube alignments are correct and that the end-of-stroke are set
correctly.

Perform preliminary tomography checks, section4.4.

Never exceed the maximum permissible tolerance (2% of FFD, where

FFD stands for focal distance).

Incorrect adjustment of the layer causes incorrect dose and exposure.

1.1 Verification of the tomography by means of X-ray emission

• Move the table to the horizontal position.
• Move the Mobile Area onto 550 mm ± 50 from the external edge of the frame on the
feet-side.
• Select a 40°tomography - 1.25sec – layer height of 100mm.
• Place the phantom on the tabletop onto the selected layer height.
• Insert a 18x24 cm cassette in division per two, if on film, or related exam on Digital
system.
• Execute two tomographies, one tomography for each direction (the first one from the
head-side to the feet-side, the second one from the feet-side to the head-side) without
changing the angle and layer.
• Verify the layer height correspondence and, if necessary, correct it as per the Setup
procedure chapt.1.2 pag.2.
• Execute a series of tomographic films for each tomo angle at layers of 40-100-160mm
for different layer heights.
1.2 Tomography fine adjustment in Setup
The sequence of commands for the fine adjustment of the tomography layer on film is as follows:
• Measure the difference of layer between the selected value and the value obtained.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON ( the display of the control panel applying to “Layer
height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-button, select the code
corresponding to the adjustment in tomography on film (this is visualised on the “layer
height” display).

ADJUSTMENT OF TOMOGRAPHY ON FILM code 049

Section 4.7: Tomographic controls - rev. 2 November 2019 - page 2/6

OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons,
select the value of correction of the layer: each number corresponds to 2mm of layer
compared with the theoric value (this will be visualised on the “tilting angle” display).
• Press the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value of 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.

Example: if the value 005 is selected and no correction of the layer occurs, it will be
sufficient to select the value 001 to obtain a –8mm real layer compared to the one selected;
by selecting the value 009 it will be obtained a +8mm real layer compared with the one
selected .

The sequence of commands for the fine adjustment of the layer in digital
tomography/tomosynthesis is as follows:
• Measure the difference of layer between the selected value and the value obtained.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON ( the display of the control panel applying to “Layer
height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-button, select the code
corresponding to the adjustment in tomography on film (this is visualised on the “layer
height” display).

DIGITAL TOMOGRAPHY/TOMOSYNTHESIS ADJUSTMENT code 050

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons,
select the value of correction of the layer: each number corresponds to 2mm of layer
compared with the theoric value (this will be visualised on the “tilting angle” display).
• Press the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 OR P48 (Reset)
push-button if you do not want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value of 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.

Example: if the value 005 is selected and no correction of the layer occurs, it will be
sufficient to select the value 001 to obtain a –8mm real layer compared to the one selected;
by selecting the value 009 it will be obtained a +8mm real layer compared with the one
selected .

Section 4.7: Tomographic controls - rev. 2 November 2019 page 3/6

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.3 Automatic increase in tomography

The automatic increase in tomography makes it easier the research of the layer to be determined
since it automatically updates the layer height at the end of each tomography: this updating is
represented by a value selected during the installation of the equipment. The use of this function is
activated by pressing the P24 push-button on the control panel or same-function button on the
digital system.

1.3.1 Tomography automatic increase selection

The sequence of commands for selecting the value of the layer automatic increase in tomography is
as follows:
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of the control panel applying to “Layer
height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, select the wanted code
(this is visualised on the “layer height” display).

LAYER AUTOMATIC INCREASE code 036

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (backwards) and P32 OR P67 (onwards) push-buttons,
select the value of the layer automatic increase compared with the set value (this will be
visualised on the “tilting angle” display).

AUTOMATIC INCREASE OF 1 MILLIMETER value 001

AUTOMATIC INCREASE OF 2 MILLIMETERS value 002
AUTOMATIC INCREASE OF 3 MILLIMETERS value 003
AUTOMATIC INCREASE OF 4 MILLIMETERS value 004
AUTOMATIC INCREASE OF 5 MILLIMETERS value 005
AUTOMATIC INCREASE OF 6 MILLIMETERS value 006
AUTOMATIC INCREASE OF 7 MILLIMETERS value 007
AUTOMATIC INCREASE OF 8 MILLIMETERS value 008
AUTOMATIC INCREASE OF 9 MILLIMETERS value 009
AUTOMATIC INCREASE OF 10 MILLIMETERS value 010

• Press the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or the P57 or P48(Reset)
push-button if you do not want to confirm it.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value of 000 in
both cases.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

1.3.2 Verification of the tomographic automatic increase

The following adjustments require X-ray emission. You shall take

adequate precautions in order to prevent anyone and any part of your
body from being directly or indirectly exposed to X-ray emissions.

• Move the table to the horizontal position.

Section 4.7: Tomographic controls - rev. 2 November 2019 - page 4/6

OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

• Move the Mobile Area onto 550 mm ± 50 from the external edge of the frame on the
feet-side.
• Select a 40°tomography - 1.2sec – layer height of 100mm.
• Select the automatic increase by pressing the P24 push-button.
• Place the phantom on the tabletop at the set layer
• Insert a 40x30 cm cassette in division per four, if on film, or the related Digital exam.
• Execute four tomographies in a sequence without changing the angle and layer.
• Develop the film and verify, starting from the first exposure, that the increase in the layer
corresponds to the value set.

1.4 Verification of the tomosynthesis by means of X-ray emission

• Bring the table in horizontal position.
• Bring the mobile area to 550 mm ± 50 from the outer edge of the foot-side frame.
• Select tomosynthesis, 40° /7.5sec - 100mm layer.
• Place the phantom on the tabletop at the set layer.
• Perform two tomosyntheses, one in each direction (the first one from head to foot, the
second one from foot to head, without changing angle or layer).
• Check the correspondence with the layer and, if necessary, fine-adjust it according to the
procedure in section.1.5 Fine tomosynthesis adjustment in Setup, page 5.
• Perform a series of tomo exposures for each tomo angle, in layers of 40-100-160 mm in
various layer thicknesses.

1.5 Fine tomosynthesis adjustment in Setup

This adjustment is not necessary if it has already been performed in Tomography.

Refer to chapt. 1.2 if you need to perform adjustment in Tomosynthesis.

Section 4.7: Tomographic controls - rev. 2 November 2019 page 5/6

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

Blank Page

Section 4.7: Tomographic controls - rev. 2 November 2019 - page 6/6

OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

Section 4.8: Longitudinal tabletop - rev. 6 November 2015

1. Longitudinal tabletop ................................................................................................................... 2

1.1 Verification of the transmission movement direction .......................................................... 2
1.1.1 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 3Pt17 potentiometer ............................................................................................................. 3
1.2.1 Reference potentiometer position.................................................................................................... 3
1.2.2 Potentiometer ends ......................................................................................................................... 6
1.2.3 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 7
1.2.4 Stop position ................................................................................................................................... 7
1.2.5 23S3 operation unit ......................................................................................................................... 7

Notes:
Position of the longitudinal tabletop transmission: modified
Adjustment instructions for OT20c: enclosed.
Adjustment instructions for OT30/90c and OT90ce
Adjustment instructions for longitudinal tabletop at 1500mm
Added directions for new CPU
Added adjustment for longitudinal asymmetrical tabletop 1010 and 950 mm
Added adjustment for longitudinal asymmetrical tabletop 1200 mm
Added adjustment for longitudinal asymmetrical tabletop 1800 mm

From Serial Number 18592 the transmission of the longitudinal tabletop is

modified passing from the head-side to the feet-side on all the models
available.
In order to configure the transmission position, you shall execute the
procedure described in Section 3 chapter 1.19.
This configuration must be executed before any other possible operations.

Section 4.8: Longitudinal tabletop - rev. 6 November 2015 page 1/8

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1. Longitudinal tabletop
1.1 Verification of the transmission movement direction
During this phase the axis movements are free and not subject to the
software control.
Pay your best attention while moving the axis in this situation.

If you have to replace either the motor or the reduction gear of the longitudinal tabletop and/or each
time you have to remove the potentiometer from its housing, it will be necessary to repeat the
connection of the potentiometer with the mechanical axis and then repeat again the acquisition of
the values applying to the ends-of-strokes.
Should you have to execute an adjustment, it will be necessary to carry out the following procedure:

1.1.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for verifying the direction of the tabletop transmission is
as follows:
• Enter the Setup modality (section 1 page 2) while moving the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the
display of the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise
000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the longitudinal tabletop transmission movement (this will be visualised on the
“layer height” display).
LONGITUDINAL TABLETOP TRANSMISSION MOVEMENT code 074
• By means of P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max end of stroke) push-
buttons you can select the tabletop longitudinal transmission movement (this will be
visualised on the “Tilting angle” display).
VERIFICATION OF THE MOVEMENT DIRECTION value 001
• By means of the remote keyboard, check that the P44A push-button commands the
leftwards longitudinal tabletop displacement and that P44C push-button commands the
rightwards longitudinal tabletop displacement rightwards, P39 increases speed
displacement movement.
• Otherwise, you shall inspect the wiring of the 3Mt17 motor (drawing 55169f.6bis+).
• Press P33 (Enter) push-button to confirm or P57 or P48(Reset) push-button if you do not
want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.

PP44A PP44C

PP39

Section 4.8: Longitudinal tabletop - rev. 6 November 2015 page 2/8

OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.2 3Pt17 potentiometer

1.2.1 Reference potentiometer position

Normally the reference potentiometer does not require any adjustments, unless it gets damaged
and/or must be replaced.

Should you have to execute any possible adjustments, you shall execute the following procedure:

• Move the table to the horizontal position.

• Move the longitudinal tabletop to the centred position compared with the mechanical
excursion or C value indicated in the drawing Figure 1: drawing.43482 f.7+, in case of
symmetrical table top stroke.
• Move the longitudinal tabletop to the centred position compared with the mechanical
excursion or C value indicated in drawing Figure 2: drawing .43482 f.7A+ in case of
asymmetrical table top stroke
• Switch off the equipment.
• Connect a digital multimeter between:

Valid for: CPU cod.55361 CPU cod.55973

Vcc probe: 25S1-TP2 INAN6 25S1-TP2..6A -INAN6A-
0Vprobe: 25S1-TP2.0 V15 25S1-TP2.17/18A -0V15-

• Switch on the equipment.

• Verify that the voltage value that can be read on the multimeter is 5Vcc±0.05.
• Otherwise you shall:
slightly unloose the two socket-head screws fixing the support square of the
potentiometer.
Turn the potentiometer gear so as to get the proper reading.
Connect the potentiometer gear with the reduction unit gear.
Fix the support square again by means of the screws that were unloosen previously.
• After completing the whole procedure, you shall switch on the equipment and verify the
proper position of the potentiometer by executing the following operations:
Command a rightwards tabletop longitudinal displacement → the voltage on the
multimeter shall increase.
Command a leftwards tabletop longitudinal displacement → the voltage on the
multimeter shall decrease.

Section 4.8: Longitudinal tabletop - rev. 6 November 2015 page 3/8

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1 2

Figure 1: drawing.43482 f.7+

LONGITUDINAL SYMMETRIC TABLETOP TRANSMISSION

Tables 2400 mm long Tables 2100 mm long

3 1100 mm tabletop 3 950 mm tabletop
A 550mm±2 A 475mm±2
B 550mm±2 B 475mm±2

4 1500 mm tabletop
A 750mm±2
B 750mm±2

5 1600 mm tabletop 5 1600 mm tabletop

A 750mm±2 A 750mm±2
B 750mm±2 B 750mm±2

1 If the longitudinal tabletop option is present (code 289 value 001) the SFD movement is limited of 160mm
from the head-side
2 If the longitudinal tabletop option is present (code 289 value 002) the SFD movement is limited of 160mm
from the feet-side.
3 If the longitudinal tabletop option is present (code 20 value 001÷ 004) acquire the end of stroke as shown in the
table for tabletop 1100 and 950mm.
4 If the longitudinal tabletop option is present (code 20 value 006 ÷ 007) acquire the end of stroke as shown in
the table for tabletop 1500mm.
5 If the longitudinal tabletop option is present (code 20 value 014 ÷ 015) acquire the end of stroke as shown in
the table for tabletop 1600mm.

Section 4.8: Longitudinal tabletop - rev. 6 November 2015 page 4/8

OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

Figure 2: drawing .43482 f.7A+

LONGITUDINAL ASYMMETRIC TABLETOP TRANSMISSION

2400mm tabletop 2100mm tabletop

9 1200 mm tabletop 7 1010 mm tabletop

A 1000mm±2 A 860mm±2
B 200mm±2 B 150mm±2
C 400mm±2 C 355mm±2

8 950 mm tabletop
A 800mm±2
B 150mm±2
C 325mm±2

6 This asymmetric table must be assembled with the following longitudinal tabletop code/value: code
289 value 002, in addition the SFD stroke will be 160mm limited at feet side.
7 In case of longitudinal tabletop (code 20 value 008÷009) acquire the end of stroke as shown in the
table for asymmetric tabletop 1010 mm.
8 In case of longitudinal tabletop (code 20 value 010÷011) acquire the end of stroke as shown in the
table for asymmetric tabletop 950 mm.
9 In case of longitudinal tabletop (code 20 value 012÷013) acquire the end of stroke as shown in the
table for asymmetric tabletop 1200 mm.

Section 4.8: Longitudinal tabletop - rev. 6 November 2015 page 5/8

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

The wrong selection of the longitudinal tabletop transmission position or

the wrong paring between the longitudinal tabletop and its stroke, can
cause damages between mechanical parts being in movement.

1.2.2 Potentiometer ends

During the movements of the axis by means of the Setup procedure,

the operator shall be responsible for possible damages caused by
wrong operations.

• Move the table to the horizontal position, the stand being in the centered position.
• Command a rightwards longitudinal tabletop movement in order to reach the B value
indicated in drawing Figure 1: drawing.43482 f.7+ for tabletop with asymmetrical stroke
and Figure 2: drawing .43482 f.7A+ for table top with symmetrical stroke.
• Should not it be possible to reach the value indicated you shall
Enter the Setup modality (Section 1 page 2)
Select code 074 value 002.
By means of the PP44C push-button on the remote keyboard, command the
movement up to reach the indicated value.
Press the P33 <ENTER> push-button of the control panel in order to get the
acquisition of the new value.
• Move the table to the horizontal position, the stand being in the centered position and the
Mobile Area onto the left end-of-stroke..
• Command a leftwards angle of the stand in order to reach the A value indicated in the
drawing Figure 1: drawing.43482 f.7+ for tabletop with symmetrical stroke and
Figure 2: drawing .43482 f.7A+.for tabletop with asymmetrical stroke
• Should not it be possible to reach the value indicated you shall:
Enter the Setup modality (Section 1 page 2).
Select code 074 value 001.
By means of the PP44A push-button of the remote keyboard command the
movement up to reach the indicated value.
Press the P33 <ENTER> push-button of the control panel in order to get the
acquisition of the new value.
• Quit the Setup modality.

The value of the stop in the central position of the longitudinal tabletop is
calculated by the software controlling the equipment and does not need any
adjustments.

• Verify that the stops onto both the right and left end-of-strokes are correct, otherwise
you shall repeat the acquisition of the end-of-stroke values.

Section 4.8: Longitudinal tabletop - rev. 6 November 2015 page 6/8

OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.2.3 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for modifying the value of an end-of-stroke is as
follows:
• Lead the movement concerned onto the end-of-stroke to be acquired.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of the control panel applying to the “layer
height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) push-button and P35 (decrease) push-button you shall
select the code of the transmission concerned (this will be visualised on the “Layer
height” display).

LONGITUDINAL TABLETOP code 074

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max end of stroke)
push-buttons you can select the end-of-stroke to be modified.

Left END OF STROKE value 001

Right END OF STROKE valee 002

• By means of the remote keyboard, press the P44A (left mobile area) and P44C (right
mobile area) push-buttons you can move the axis as needed, combined with push button
P39 table displacement speed will increase
• Press the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorise the new value or P57 or P48 (Reset) push-
button if you do not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value of 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the installation programme.

1.2.4 Stop position

Verify that the values of the end-of-stroke acquired correspond to what specified in the drawing
Figure 1: drawing.43482 f.7+ in case of symmetrical table top stroke, Figure 2: drawing .43482
f.7A+ in case of asymmetrical table top stroke:
Value A ±2mm
Value B ±2mm

1.2.5 23S3 operation unit

The operation unit of the longitudinal tabletop is shared with the stand
movement.
Possible adjustments executed on the operation gear must be executed
only according to the specifications applying to the Stand - Section 4.4
chapt. 1.3 – 23S3 operatio unit..

Section 4.8: Longitudinal tabletop - rev. 6 November 2015 page 7/8

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

Blank page

Section 4.8: Longitudinal tabletop - rev. 6 November 2015 page 8/8

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

Section 4.9: Focal Distance - rev. 4 November 2015

1. Focal Distance .............................................................................................................................. 2

1.1 24S7 operation unit .............................................................................................................. 2
1.1.1 Fundamental settings........................................................................................................ 2
1.2.1 Setup.................................................................................................................................... 7
1.3 Zero position of the 3FC5 reference photocell ................................................................... 8
1.3.1 Setup................................................................................................................................. 8
1.4 Stop position ........................................................................................................................ 9

Notes:

The variable focal distance is optional for the O-T20c model.

The following adjustments are valid only when the code 076 is selected
with value different 002 with variable focal distance (please make
reference to Section 3 Chapt. 1.16).
Two focal distance available: 150cm or 180cm.

Section 4.9: Focal Distance - rev. 4 November 2015 - page 1/10

OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1. Focal Distance
1.1 24S7 operation unit
GMD04 type- operations unit for step by step motors 400step/revolution
GMH09 type- operations unit for step by step 3200step/revolution
B4 Plus type - operations unit for step by step 3200step/revolution

The operations unit 24S7 is shared with the I.I. movement – Section 4.19
(rif. Dis. 55169 f.15+)

Plus B4 is used on systems with only FD with step by step motor.

All the equipments before the SW version V08 are made with the GMD04
step by step operation unit.
From V08 SW version, all the equipments are made with the GMH09 step
by step operation unit. The operation unit GMH09 can replace the
GMD04 if set to 400 step/revolution (1/4 of step).
The equipment with the operation unit GMD04 can be up dated with the
GMH09 operation unit, set to 3200 step/revolution by using the proper kit.

BEFORE REMOVING THE OPERATION UNIT FROM THE

RACK, PLEASE MAKE SURE THAT ALL THE LEDS ON THE
FRONT SIDE ARE SWITCHED OFF. DO NOT EXECUTE ANY
SETTINGS WHEN THE EQUIPMENT IS SWITCHED ON.

1.1.1 Fundamental settings

The fundamental settings must be executed by qualified personnel at

the installation or when a replacement is going to be executed relating
to the kind of motor in use and its application.
Wrong settings may cause failures and damages, as well as a possible
bad functioning.

Section 4.9: Focal Distance - rev. 4 November 2015 Page 2/10

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

a) GMD04 type – operation unit for step by step motor cod. 39727

JUMPERS
Verify the following settings:

DRF: CLOSED
FC: OPENED

DIP-SWITCHES
Verify the following settings:

Section 4.9: Focal Distance - rev. 4 November 2015 - page 3/10

OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

b) GMH09 type - operation unit for step by step motor cod. 55903

c) GMH09 type - operation unit for step by step motor cod. 55903A

JUMPERS
Verify the following settings:

DRF: CLOSED
FC: OPENED
DO/UP: CLOSED on UP (ON input NPN)
12/5: CLOSED on 12 (ON working in input at12V)

Section 4.9: Focal Distance - rev. 4 November 2015 Page 4/10

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

The jumpers DO/UP and 12/5 must be put in one or the other possible
position. The operation unit doesn’t work in case of different jumpers
conbinations.

DIP -SWITCHES
Verify the following settings:

Standard Configuration Configuration to change GMD04 operation unit

6,7A 6,7A
Equalizzazione Equalizzazione

¼ passo
3200 passi
400 passi

Section 4.9: Focal Distance - rev. 4 November 2015 - page 5/10

OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

d) Plus B4 type - operation unit for step by step motor cod. 57294.

DIP -SWITCHES
Verify the following settings:

DP1 configuration DP2 configuration

ALL OPERATION UNITS DO NOT REQUIRE ANY ADJUSTMENT

Section 4.9: Focal Distance - rev. 4 November 2015 Page 6/10

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.2 Verification of the transmission movement direction

During this phase the axis movements are free and not subject to the
software control.
Pay your best attention while moving the axis in this situation.

• Verify the movement direction according to the Setup modality (Section 1 page 2).
• Switch on the equipment while the Setup modality is selected.
• Verify the correct movement direction.
• Through opposite movement check the wirings of the motor phases (dis.55169 f.15+).

1.2.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for verifying the direction of the focal transmission is as
follows:
• Power ON: enter the Installation while moving the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of
the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the focal distance transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer
height” display).

FOCAL DISTANCE TRANSMISSION MOVEMENT code 064

• By means of P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max end of stroke) push-
buttons you can select the focal distance transmission movement (this will be visualised
on the “Tilting angle” display).
•

VERIFICATION OF THE MOVEMENT DIRECTION value 002

• By means of the remote keyboard, check that the P44D (outwards transversal tabletop)
push-button commands the focal distance downwards movement and that P44B (inwards
transversal tabletop) push-button commands the focal distance upwards movement.
• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 OR P48 (Reset) push-button if you do
not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

PP44B

PP44D

Section 4.9: Focal Distance - rev. 4 November 2015 - page 7/10

OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.3 Zero position of the 3FC5 reference photocell

• Move the table to the horizontal position.
• Move the 3FC5 end of stroke to the position shown in drawing dis.43482 f.6+ pag.9
(the upper limit of the focal distance must coincide with the upper limit of the stand).
• By means of the instruction of the Setup procedure (Section 1 page 2), you shall verify
that the stop position of the focal distance is 115 cm, otherwise you shall adjust the end-
of-stroke positioning.

1.3.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for verifying the stop to zero on the focal distance end
of stroke is as follows:
• Power ON: enter the Installation while moving the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of
the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the focal distance transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer
height” display).

FOCAL DISTANCE TRANSMISSION MOVEMENT code 064

• By means of the P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max end of stroke)
push-buttons you can select the transmission movement of the Focal Distance with stop
on the end-of-stroke (this will be visualised on the “Tilting angle” display).

END OF STROKE VERIFICATION value 001

• By means of P44D push-button and P44B push-button on the remote-keyboard, it is

possible to move the axis in both directions with stop on the relevant end of stroke.
• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 OR P48 (Reset) push-button if you do
not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

Section 4.9: Focal Distance - rev. 4 November 2015 Page 8/10

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.4 Stop position

This indicates the stop position of the movement (expressed in mm).
Verify that the focal distance gets the positions onto the values indicated in drawing 43482 f.6+.
FD at 115cm value B (0mm) ±1mm
FD at 135cm value C (200mm) ±1mm
FD at 150cm value A (350mm) ±1mm
FD at 180cm value A (650mm) ±1mm (if present)
Should this value be higher or lower compared with the tolerances, it will be necessary to execute
the adjustment of the 3Fc5 zero-end of stroke.

Fig. 1: dis.43482 f.6+ 1

The “Y” value must be measured with the Stand-SFD group being in the centered position.
Section 4.9: Focal Distance - rev. 4 November 2015 - page 9/10
OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

Blank page

Section 4.9: Focal Distance - rev. 4 November 2015 Page 10/10

OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

Section 4.10: Collimator - rev 3 July 2008

1. Collimator .................................................................................................................................... 2
1.1 3Pt7 reference potentiometer (parallel blades) ................................................................... 2
1.1.1 Reference potentiometer position.................................................................................................... 2
1.1.2 Potentiometer ends ......................................................................................................................... 2
1.1.3 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 3Pt8 reference potentiometer (perpendicular blades) .......................................................... 4
1.2.1 Reference potentiometer position.................................................................................................... 4
1.2.2 Potentiometer ends ......................................................................................................................... 4
1.2.3 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 5
1.3 3Pt9 reference potentiometer (iris blades) ........................................................................... 6
1.3.1 Reference potentiometer position.................................................................................................... 6
1.3.2 Potentiometer ends ......................................................................................................................... 6
1.3.3 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 6
1.4 3Pt19 Reference potentiometer (Motorized filters) ............................................................. 7
1.4.1 Reference potentiometer position.................................................................................................... 7
1.4.2 Potentiometer ends ......................................................................................................................... 7
1.4.3 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 7
1.5 Alignments and centerings ................................................................................................... 8
1.5.1 Verification of the collimator light/X-rays correspondence............................................................ 8
1.5.2 Cross adjustment............................................................................................................................. 9
1.5.3 Replacement of the lamp ............................................................................................................... 10
1.5.4 Verification of the alignments ...................................................................................................... 11
1.6 Collimator fields (aperture) ................................................................................................ 12
1.7 Over-collimation on film ................................................................................................... 13
1.7.1 Setup ............................................................................................................................................. 13
1.7.2 Verification of the X-ray beam ...................................................................................................... 14
1.8 Under-collimation on I.I. ................................................................................................... 15
1.8.1 Setup ............................................................................................................................................. 15
1.8.2 X - rays check................................................................................................................................ 16
Notes:

Section 4.10: Collimator - rev 3 July 2008 – page 1/16

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1. Collimator

The following adjustments only apply to the acquisition of the ends-of-

strokes for all the models of collimators being available for the Opera T
series. For further information on the mechanical adjustments, please
make reference to the original manuals supplied together with the
collimators.
1.1 3Pt7 reference potentiometer (parallel blades)

1.1.1 Reference potentiometer position

Please make reference to the manual applying to the kind of collimator being installed.

1.1.2 Potentiometer ends

• Move the table to the horizontal position.
• Switch off the equipment.
• In manual modality you shall completely close the blades of the parallel collimator
(A/Fig. 1 pag.2).
• The values of the minimum end-of-stroke can be acquired according to the instructions
specified in the Setup procedure (Section 1 page 2).
• In manual modality you shall completely open the blades of the parallel collimator
(A/Fig. 1 pag.2).
• The values of the maximum end-of-stroke can be acquired according to the instructions
specified in the Setup procedure (Section 1 page 2).

A
Fig. 1: Parallel blades collimator

Section 4.10: Collimator - rev 3 July 2008 - pag. 2/16

OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.1.3 Setup

The sequence of commands to be executed for modifying the value of an end of stroke is as follows:
• Lead the movement concerned onto the end of stroke to be acquired.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of the control panel applying to the “layer
height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the wanted value. The code of the transmission concerned will be visualised on
the “layer height” display.

PARALLEL COLLIMATOR code 005

• By means of P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max end of stroke) push-
buttons you can select the end of stroke to be modified.

Minimum END OF STROKE value 001

Maximum END OF STROKE value 002

• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 or P48(Reset) push-button if you do not
want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

Section 4.10: Collimator - rev 3 July 2008 – page 3/16

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.2 3Pt8 reference potentiometer (perpendicular blades)

1.2.1 Reference potentiometer position

Please make reference to the manual applying to the kind of collimator being installed.

1.2.2 Potentiometer ends

• Move the table to the horizontal position.
• Switch off the equipment.
• In manual modality you shall completely close the blades of the perpendicular collimator
(A/Fig. 2 pag.4).
• The values of the minimum ends-of-strokes can be acquired according to the instructions
specified in the Setup procedure (Section 1 page 2).
• In manual modality you shall completely open the blades of the perpendicular collimator
(A/Fig. 2 pag.4).
• The values of the maximum end-of-stroke can be acquired according to the instructions
specified in the Setup procedure (Section 1 page 2).

Fig. 2: Perpendicular blades collimator

Section 4.10: Collimator - rev 3 July 2008 - pag. 4/16

OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.2.3 Setup

The sequence of commands to be executed for modifying the value of an end of stroke is as follows:

• Lead the movement concerned onto the end of stroke to be acquired.

• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of the control panel applying to the “layer
height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code of the transmission concerned (this will be visualised on the “layer height” display).

PERPENDICULAR COLLIMATOR code 006

• By means of P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max end of stroke) push-
buttons you can select the end of stroke to be modified.

Minimum END OF STROKE value 001

Maximum END OF STROKE value 002

• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 or P48(Reset) push-button if you do not
want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

Section 4.10: Collimator - rev 3 July 2008 – page 5/16

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3 3Pt9 reference potentiometer (iris blades)

Optional: only for MCR2 collimator or Iris collimator Ralco type

1.3.1 Reference potentiometer position

Please make reference to the manual applying to the kind of collimator being installed.

1.3.2 Potentiometer ends

• Move the table to the horizontal position.
• Move onto the end-of-stroke to be acquired by making reference to the Setup procedure
(Section 1 page 2).
• Verify the iris opening on the tabletop
• Acquire the new value of the minimum and maximum ends-of-strokes according to the
instructions specified in the Setup procedure.

1.3.3 Setup

The sequence of commands to be executed for modifying the value of an end of stroke is as follows:

• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of the control panel applying to the “layer
height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code of the transmission concerned (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).

IRIS COLLIMATOR code 007

• By means of P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max end of stroke) push-
buttons you can select the end of stroke to be modified: it will be sufficient to keep the
relevant push- pressed and visually check the aperture/closing of the iris by means of the
luminous beam projection on the tabletop.

Minimum END OF STROKE value 001

Maximum END OF STROLE value 002

• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 or P48 (Reset) push-button if you do not
want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

Section 4.10: Collimator - rev 3 July 2008 - pag. 6/16

OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.4 3Pt19 Reference potentiometer (Motorized filters)

1.4.1 Reference potentiometer position

Please make reference to the manual applying to the kind of collimator being installed.

1.4.2 Potentiometer ends

Move the table to the horizontal position.

• Remove the collimator front covers
• Move onto the Minimum end-of-stroke (0AL filter) and acquire by the Setup procedure
(Sect.1 page.2).
• Move onto the maximum end of stroke ( 2AL filter) and acquire by the Setup procedure
(Sect.1 page.2).

1.4.3 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for modifying the end of stroke value is the following:
• Move onto ON the 25S3-Sw1.1 (the display of the control panel applying to the “layer
height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push buttons, you shall select the code of
the transmission concerned (this will be visualised on the “layer height” display).

COLLIMATOR AUTOMATIC FILTERS code 083

• By means of P31 or P66 (Fc min.) and P32 or P67 (Fc max.) push buttons, you shall
select the end of stroke that you want modify.
• By means of PP44A (clockwise filters rotation) or PP44C (counter clockwise filters
rotation) push buttons positioned on the remote small keyboard, do remote control the
filters movement until they will reach the following quote:

Minimum END OF STROKE (0AL filter) value 001

Maximum END OF STROKE (2AL filter) value 002

• Press push button P33 (Enter) to store the new value, or in the other hand, press P57 or
P48 (Reset) push buttons, to quit the programme.
• The value displayed on the console control panel applying to the “tilting angle” in both
cases will visualise 000.
• Move onto OFF the 25S3-Sw1-1 to leave the installation programme.

PP44A PP44C

PP39

Section 4.10: Collimator - rev 3 July 2008 – page 7/16

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.5 Alignments and centerings

The following adjustments require X-ray emissions. You shall take

adequate precautions in order to prevent anyone and any part of your
body from being directly or indirectly exposed to X-rays.

1.5.1 Verification of the collimator light/X-rays correspondence

• Move the table to the horizontal position, FD 115 cm, stand and SFD centered, Mobile
Area according to your choice.
• Place a 24x30 cm cassette on the tabletop.
• By means of the collimator light, you shall center the cassette under the X-ray beam.
• Open the collimator blades in order to have a 18x22 cm field on the tabletop and switch
on the lamp for positioning 16 ø8 washers on the edges of the luminous field and 1 ø4
washer as shown in Fig. 3 pag.8.
• Each pair of the ø8 washers must be positioned in order for the pair inside the beam to
result lighted up as much as possible and the pair outside the luminous beam to be
lighted up as less as possible, the remaining ø4 washer is used for ensuring the film
orientation.
• Execute a radiography and develop the film.
• Normally the collimator does not need any adjustments.
• Anyway, should an adjustment be necessary, you shall follow the manufacturer’s
instructions.

Fig. 3: Collimator – position of the reference washers

Section 4.10: Collimator - rev 3 July 2008 - pag. 8/16

OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.5.2 Cross adjustment

• Switch on the collimator light.
• Close the blades so as to have a “stripe” of light in the two directions alternatively.
• Verify that the projected line is centered in the luminous stripe.
• Should an adjustment be necessary, remove the lower cover of the collimator, unloose
the four screws fixing the transparent plastic panel to the collimator and position the
panel so as to center the cross inside the luminous stripe; tight the four screws that were
previously unloosen and restore the cover as originally foreseen.

Fig. 4: Collimator - cross projection

Section 4.10: Collimator - rev 3 July 2008 – page 9/16

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.5.3 Replacement of the lamp

Assembling procedure only for MCR1 and MCR2 tyre, about Ralco model make
reference to their proper manuals

• Unloose the screw (B/Fig. 5) and remove the back cover (A/Fig. 5).
• Remove the lamp (C/Fig. 5).
Attention! Be careful while removing the lamp since it can be very hot.
• Insert the new lamp (Type: OSRAM HLX 64642 LONGLIFE 24V 150W)

Attention! Do not touch the lamp with your bear fingers: you shall
use the special plastic receptacle included in the packing.
.
• Restore the cover that was previously removed.
• After replacing the lamp, you shall check the “light/X-ray” centering according to what
specified in the procedure specified in 1.4.1 page 7.
• You shall verify that the lamp of the luminous centering device lights up for 30 seconds, both
from the control panel and locally.

Fig. 5: Replacement of the collimator lamp

Section 4.10: Collimator - rev 3 July 2008 - pag. 10/16

OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.5.4 Verification of the alignments

Before starting the alignment operations you shall verify the centerings
of the longitudinal cassette-holder Section 4.17 and transversal cassette-
holder Section 4.18.

• Align the collimator in order for the centre of the luminous beam of the collimator to
correspond to the centre of the SFD.
• By means of a spirit level, verify the support base is perfectly horizontal.
• By means of a spirit level, verify the table is perfectly horizontal.
• Verify the stand is in the proper perpendicular position.
• By means of a spirit level, verify the rotation tube group is perfectly horizontal.
• Place the table in the horizontal position and the stand in the vertical position and set the
FD at 115 cm.
•

With no need to command any X-ray emissions, you shall proceed according to the following:

• Execute a Preparation;
• Switch off the equipment (the cassette-holder being in the Radiography preparation
position); wait 30 sec. and switch on the collimator lamp.
• Execute the centering of the centre of the cross projected by the collimator onto the
centre of the SFD: this centering shall be exclusively executed by adjusting the screws
fixing the X-ray tube (please make reference to the ‘Installation Manual’ Verify that the
deviation of the centre of the luminous beam from the centre of the cassette-holder is not
higher than 1.2% of the relevant focal distance.
• Mark the I.I. centre by means of a φ4mm washer.
• Move the cassette-holder to the parking position; switch on the collimator light and
verify that the projection of the cross coincide with the centre of the washer.
• Measure the deviation of the cross projected by the collimator compared with the original
position.
• Move the tilting onto the clockwise and counter-clockwise end of stroke positions and
modify the focal distance.
• Verify that the deviation of the centre of the luminous beam from the centre of the I.I. is
not higher than 1.2% of the relevant focal distance.

Section 4.10: Collimator - rev 3 July 2008 – page 11/16

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.6 Collimator fields (aperture)

• Before measuring the fields, you shall make sure that the over-collimation factor on the
SFD and the under-collimation factor on the I.I. are equal to 0 (codes 121-131 and codes
149-159 respectively).
• Verify that the fields measured correspond to the Setup standard apertures.
• Should these be outside the tolerances, you shall execute the fine adjustment of the over-
collimation according to the Setup procedure (Section 1 page 2).
• Measure the projection of the luminous beam on the tabletop.
• A 10mm increase (corresponding to 0.9% ) is considered by default compared with the
film dimension.

Standard aperture = [(divisions size + correction) correzione)*(FFD/PFD)]/FFD

es: [(180+10)*(1150-78]/1150=177,1mm

FFD Divisions Minimum Minimum Standard Standard Maximum Maximum

size
Focus to aperture aperture aperture aperture aperture aperture
film
distance
on On On
Patient on film Patient On film Patient On film
tabletop tabletop tabletop
(0%FFD) (0% FFD) (0,9%FFD) (0,9%FFD) (2%DFF) (2%DFF)

mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
18/1 167,8 180 177,1 190 189,2 203
18/4 41,9 45 51,3 55 63,4 68
43/1 400,8 430 410,1 440 422,3 453
1150 43/4 100,2 107,5 109,5 117,5 121,6 130,5
7” 165,7 177,8 175,1 187,8 187,1 200,8
7”/4 41,4 44,5 50,8 54,5 62,9 67,5
17” 402,5 431,8 411,8 441,8 423,9 454,8
17”/4 100,6 107,9 109,9 117,9 122,1 130,9

Tabletop TFD
(Tabletop-to-Film distance)
Concave fixed 78mm
Flat fixed 95mm
Concave with longitudinal displacement 81mm
Flat with longitudinal displacement 98mm

Section 4.10: Collimator - rev 3 July 2008 - pag. 12/16

OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.7 Over-collimation on film

Note: over-collimation is a term used to define a collimation that is larger than the cassette-size,
thus passing the cassette dimensions; under-collimation is a term used to define a collimation that is
smaller than the cassette-size.
This adjustment allows you to execute an over-collimation or under-collimation of the collimator
apertures (field) when working with an X-ray cassette. The value of both the over-collimation and
under-collimation is ±5mm compared with the default value(0 mm – value 010).
This adjustment can only be executed after the adjustment of the end-of-stroke values par.1.1-1.2-
1.3.

1.7.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for the fine adjustment of the collimator is as follows:

• Verify the collimator apertures (fields) and define the value representing the correction to
be introduced.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of the control panel applying to the “layer
height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the transmission concerned (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).

CORRECTION OF THE OVER-COLLIMATION ON THE Code 021

FILM – PARALLEL SIDE
CORRECTION OF THE OVER-COLLIMATION ON THE Code 022
FILM – PERPENDICULAR SIDE
CORRECTION OF THE OVER-COLLIMATION ON THE Code 023
FILM – IRIS

• By means of P31 OR P66 (decrease) and P32 OR P67 (increase) push-buttons you can
select the value to be modified. Each number corresponds to 0.1 mm aperture (this will
be visualised on the “tilting angle” display).
• Press P33 (enter) push-button to memorise the new value or P57 or P48 (Reset) push-
button if you do not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.

Example: considering that with value 010 the aperture on film is 180 mm, if you select value 500 you
will obtain an aperture on film of 220 mm (the collimation increase)

Section 4.10: Collimator - rev 3 July 2008 – page 13/16

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.7.2 Verification of the X-ray beam

The following adjustments require X-ray emissions. You shall take
adequate precautions in order to prevent anyone and any part of your
body from being directly or indirectly exposed to X-rays.

Before executing the radiography you shall verify the excursion according to what specified in par.
1.5.
- Insert a 18x24 cm cassette and select a division per 4.
• Place a 24x30 cm cassette on the tabletop.
• Execute the centering of the collimator light projection onto the cassette.
• Execute a radiography and verify the apertures (fields).

• Develop the film

• Measure the A and B film sides
• Determine the film aperture by the formula :
Film aperture = A or B * [FFD/(FFD - TFD)]
• The values must be included between the minimum aperture value on film and the
maximum one (2%FFD).
• If will not be like this open and close the collimator with the codes 021, 022 e 023.
• Repeat this procedure with the cassette 43x35.
•

Light projection Cassette on tabletop

FFD (Focus AxB Minimum aperture Maximum aperture

to film Divisions on film (0%FFD) A x B on film (2%DFF) A x B
diastance) size mm mm
mm
18x24 180x240 203x263
1150 43x35 430x350 453x373
8”x10” 203,2x254 226,2x277
17”x14” 431,8x355,6 454,8x378,6

Section 4.10: Collimator - rev 3 July 2008 - pag. 14/16

OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.8 Under-collimation on I.I.

Note: under-collimation is a term used to define a collimation that is smaller than the I.I. field when
working in fluoroscopy or digital radiography. There is different adjustment for each I.I. filed and
blades.
The value of both the over-collimation and under-collimation is 5mm compared with the default
value (0 mm - value 500). This adjustment can only be executed after the adjustment of the end-of-
stroke values (par.1.1-1.2-1.3.) and after the collimation blades opening par. 1.5 being from this last
one influences.

1.8.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for the fine adjustment of the collimator is as follows:
• Verify the collimator apertures (fields) and define the value representing the correction to
be introduced.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of the control panel applying to the “layer
height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code of the transmission concerned (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).

UNDER-COLLIMATION CORRECTION ON I.I. – code 024

PARALLEL SIDE FULL FIELD
UNDER-COLLIMATION CORRECTION ON I.I. – code 025
PERPENDICULAR SIDE FULL FIELD
UNDER-COLLIMATION CORRECTION ON I.I. – IRIS code 026
FULL FIELD
UNDER-COLLIMATION CORRECTION ON I.I. – code 027
PARALLEL SIDE 1ST MAGNIFICATION
UNDER-COLLIMATION CORRECTION ON I.I. – code 028
PERPENDICULAR SIDE 1ST MAGNIFICATION
UNDER-COLLIMATION CORRECTION ON I.I. – IRIS code 029
1ST MAGNIFICATION
UNDER-COLLIMATION CORRECTION ON I.I. – code 030
PARALLEL SIDE 2ND MAGNIFICATION
UNDER-COLLIMATION CORRECTION ON I.I. – code 031
PERPENDICULAR SIDE 2ND MAGNIFICATION
UNDER-COLLIMATION CORRECTION ON I.I. – IRIS code 032
2ND MAGNIFICATION
UNDER-COLLIMATION CORRECTION ON I.I. – code 033
PARALLEL SIDE 3RD MAGNIFICATION
UNDER-COLLIMATION CORRECTION ON I.I. – code 034
PERPENDICULAR SIDE 3RD MAGNIFICATION
UNDER-COLLIMATION CORRECTION ON I.I. – IRIS code 035
3RD MAGNIFICATION

Section 4.10: Collimator - rev 3 July 2008 – page 15/16

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

• By means of P31 OR P66 (decrease) and P32 OR P67 (increase) push-buttons you can
select the value to be modified. Each number corresponds to 0.1 mm of shutting value
(this will be visualised on the “tilting angle” display).
• Press P33 (enter) push-button to memorise the new value or P57 or P48(Reset) push-
button if you do not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.

Example: considering that with value 500 the aperture is 230 mm on size I.I. of 9”, if you select value
010 you will obtain an aperture of 190 mm (the collimation decrease).

1.8.2 X - rays check

The following adjustments require X-ray emissions. You shall take

adequate precautions in order to prevent anyone and any part of your
body from being directly or indirectly exposed to X-rays.
Command a fluoroscopy and verify the apertures (fields) on the monitor.
Make reference to par.1.3. for executing the modification of the apertures.

Section 4.10: Collimator - rev 3 July 2008 - pag. 16/16

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Section 4.11: Cassette dimensions - rev.3 June 2007

1. Cassette dimension.......................................................................................................................2
1.1 3Pt10 potentiometer (Parallel jaws).....................................................................................2
1.1.1 Potentiometer position .................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 3Pt11 potentiometer (Perpendicular jaws)..........................................................................2
1.2.1 Potentiometer position .................................................................................................................... 2
1.3 3Pt10 potentiometer ends.....................................................................................................3
1.3.1 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 3
1.4 3Pt11 potentiometer ends.....................................................................................................4
1.4.1 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 4

Notes:
Added instructions for new CPU

Section 4.11: Cassette dimensions - rev.3 June 2007 page 1/6

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1. Cassette dimension
1.1 3Pt10 potentiometer (Parallel jaws)

1.1.1 Potentiometer position

• Move the equipment onto the vertical position.
• Switch off the equipment.
• Put the adjustment template code GMM 71598 inside the cassette-holder: this template
corresponds to the C value (332±1mm) shown in Fig. 1 pag.5 (use the segments A – B of
the template).
• Connect a digital multimeter between:
Valid for: CPU cod. 55361 CPU cod. 55973
Vcc probe: 25S1-TP2.IN-AN10 25S1-TP2.10A - INAN10A -
0V probe: 25S1-TP2.0V15 25S1- TP2.17/18A - 0V15 -
• Switch on the equipment.
• Verify that the voltage value appearing on the cursor is 5Vcc±0.05.
• Otherwise you shall:
Slightly unloose the two socket-head screws fixing the potentiometer
Turn the potentiometer so as to obtain the proper reading.
Fix again the potentiometer by means of the two screws that were unloosen previously.
(Pos.A Fig. 2 pag.6).
1.2 3Pt11 potentiometer (Perpendicular jaws)

1.2.1 Potentiometer position

• Move the equipment onto the vertical position.
• Switch off the equipment.
• Put the adjustment template code GMM 71598 inside the cassette-holder: this template
corresponds to the C value (332±1mm) shown in Fig. 1 pag.5 (use the segments A – B
of the template).
• Connect a digital multimeter between:
Valid for: CPU cod.55361 CPU cod.55973
Vcc probe: 25S1-TP2.IN-AN11 25S1-TP2.11A -INAN11A -
0V probe: 25S1-TP2.0V15 25S1- TP2.17/18A – 0V15
• Switch on the equipment.
• Verify that the voltage value appearing on the cursor is 5Vcc±0.05.
• Otherwise you shall:
Slightly unloose the two socket-head screws fixing the potentiometer
Turn the potentiometer so as to obtain the proper reading.
Fix again the potentiometer by means of the two screws that were unloosen previously.
(Pos.B Fig. 2 pag.6).

Make sure that the adjustment template code 71598 remains properly fixed
to the jaws during the manual introduction of the cassette-holder.
Section 4.11: Cassette dimensions - rev.3 June 2007 page 2/6
OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3 3Pt10 potentiometer ends

• Move the equipment onto the horizontal position.
• Switch off the equipment.
• Manually lead the cassette-holder in its loading position.
• Verify that the jaws are closed onto the minimum value (mechanical end of stroke): A
value (193±1.5mm) shown in Fig. 1 pag.5.
• By making reference to the Setup procedure (Section 1 page 2), you shall acquire the
value of the minimum end of stroke of the parallel jaws.
• Put the adjustment template code GMM 71598 inside the cassette-holder so as to obtain
the B value (471±1mm) shown in Fig. 1 pag.5 (use segments A – B – C of the template).
• By making reference to the Setup procedure (Section 1 page 2), you shall acquire the
value of the maximum end of stroke of the parallel jaws.

1.3.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for modifying the value of an end of stroke is as follows:
• Lead the movement concerned onto the end of stroke to be acquired.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of the control panel applying to the “layer
height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code of the transmission concerned (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).

PARALLEL JAWS code 008

• By means of P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max end of stroke) push-
buttons you can select the end of stroke to be modified.

Minimum END OF STROKE value 001

Maximum END OF STROKE value 002

• Press P33 (enter) push-button to memorise the new value or P57 or P48 (Reset) push-
button if you do not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.

Section 4.11: Cassette dimensions - rev.3 June 2007 page 3/6

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.4 3Pt11 potentiometer ends

• Move the equipment onto the horizontal position.
• Switch off the equipment.
• Manually lead the cassette-holder in its loading position.
• Verify that the jaws are closed onto the minimum value (mechanical end of stroke): A
value (197±1.5mm) shown in Fig. 1 pag.5.
• By making reference to the Setup procedure (Section 1 page 2), you shall acquire the
value of the minimum end of stroke of the perpendicular jaws.
• Manually lead the cassette-holder in its loading position.
• Verify that the jaws are opened onto the maximum value B (467±1mm) shown in Fig. 1
pag.5.
• By making reference to the Setup procedure (Section 1 page 2), you shall acquire the
value of the maximum end of stroke of the perpendicular jaws.

1.4.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for modifying the value of an end of stroke is as follows:
• Lead the movement concerned onto the end of stroke to be acquired.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of the control panel applying to the “layer
height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code of the transmission concerned (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).

PERPENDICULAR JAWS code 009

• By means of P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max end of stroke) push-
buttons you can select the end of stroke to be modified.

Minimum END OF STROKE value 001

Maximum END OF STROKE value 002

• Press P33 (enter) push-button to memorise the new value or P57 OR P48(Reset) push-
button if you do not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.

Section 4.11: Cassette dimensions - rev.3 June 2007 page 4/6

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Fig. 1: dis. 43482 f.8+

Section 4.11: Cassette dimensions - rev.3 June 2007 page 5/6

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

3Pt10

3Pt11

Fig. 2Cassette-dimension potentiometers

Section 4.11: Cassette dimensions - rev.3 June 2007 page 6/6

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Section 4.12: transversal tabletop - rev. 1 November 2019

1. Transversal tabletop ..................................................................................................................... 2

1.1 Verification of the transmission movement direction .......................................................... 2
1.1.1 Axis movement ................................................................................................................ 2
1.2 23S6 operation unit .............................................................................................................. 3
1.3 3FC11 and 3FC12 ends-of-strokes .................................................................................... 3
1.3.1 Microswitches adjustment................................................................................................ 3
1.4 Potenziometro 3Pt11 ............................................................................................................ 4
1.4.1 Position of the reference potentiometer ........................................................................... 5
1.4.2 Potentiometer ends ........................................................................................................... 5
1.4.2.1 End-of-stroke acquisition in Setup ............................................................................... 6
1.4.2.2 Stop position ................................................................................................................ 6

Notes:

Section 4.12: transversal tabletop - rev. 1 November 2019 – page 1/6

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1. Transversal tabletop

1.1 Verification of the transmission movement direction

During this phase the axis movements are free and not subject to the
software control.
Pay maximum attention while moving the axes in this situation!

If the transversal tabletop motor or gearbox are replaced and it is necessary to remove the
potentiometer, if present, from its housing, it is necessary to repeat the coupling of the
potentiometer with the mechanical axis and then repeat the acquisition of the end-of-stroke values.
If an adjustment is necessary, follow the procedure described below.

1.1.1 Axis movement

The sequence of commands to check the direction of transmission of the transversal tabletop is as
follows:
• From the remote keypad (Fig. 1), key PP44B controls the transversal tabletop towards the
inside of the table, key PP44D controls the transversal tabletop towards the outside.
• f not, check the motor wiring 3Mt10 (dis.55169 f.8+).

PP43B PP44B
PP44A PP44C

PP44D
Fig. 1: Remote keyboard

Section 4.12: transversal tabletop - rev. 1 November 2019 - pag. 2/6

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.2 23S6 operation unit

The operation unit of the transversal tabletop is shared with the

compressor movement.
Possible adjustments of this operation unit must be executed according to
the specifications applying to the compressor - Section 4.13 – 23S6
operation unit.
1.3 3FC11 and 3FC12 ends-of-strokes

1.3.1 Microswitches adjustment

The adjustment of the microswitches applying to the transversal tabletop end-of-stroke is executed
at the manufacturing plants; anyway, should it be necessary to carry out a possible modification,
you shall execute it as follows:

In order to execute the adjustment of the end of stroke’s microswitches, it

will be necessary to remove the tabletop from its housing.
Inadequate operations may determine damages to the microswitches.

• Remove the earthing connection of the tabletop.

• Remove the 25S3-AMP6 connector (the end-of-strokes will be deactivated).
• While keeping the tabletop by the two extremities, you shall command the tabletop
outwards transversal movement until the pinion gets out of the rack.
• Slip the tabletop off the lateral support-bars paying your best attention not to damage the
miscroswitches.
• Verify the correct correspondence between the 3Fc11end-of-stroke micro (Fig. 2 pag.3 –
inwards transversal tabletop end of stroke) and the relevant 25S3-Lv14 led.
• Verify the correct correspondence between the 3Fc12 (Fig. 2 pag.3 – outwards
transversal tabletop end of stroke) and the relevant 25S3-Lv13 led.
• Fit the tabletop into the lateral support-bars until the pinion reaches its position into the
rack, paying your best attention not to damage the microswitches.
• Command an inwards movement of the tabletop up to get the rack engages onto the
pinion.
• Restore the connection of the 25S3-AMP6 connector.
• Verify that the stops onto the ends-of-strokes are correct (dis.43482 f.7+).
• Restore the earthing connection of the tabletop.

3Fc12 3Fc11

Fig. 2: Transversal tabletop microswitch position

Section 4.12: transversal tabletop - rev. 1 November 2019 – page 3/6

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Transversal tabletop transmission

Fig. 3: dis.43482 f.7+

1.4 Potenziometro 3Pt11

Enable Virtual Scanning before acquiring the transversal tabletop end-of-

stroke.

Section 4.12: transversal tabletop - rev. 1 November 2019 - pag. 4/6

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.4.1 Position of the reference potentiometer

The reference potentiometer does not normally require adjustment, except in the event of a fault in
the potentiometer or replacement of the geared motor.
If adjustment is necessary, follow the procedure described below.
• Bring the device in a horizontal position.
• Bring the transversal tabletop to a position centred in relation to the mechanical stroke or
dimension C shown in Fig. 3: dis.43482 f.7+ pag.4.
• Switch off the system.
• Connect digital multimeter between:

Vcc probe: 25S1-TP2.11A - INAN11A -

0V probe: 25S1-TP2.17/18A - 0V15 -

- Switch on the system

• Check that the voltage at the wiper is 5Vcc0,05
• If not:
• Slightly loosen the two Allen screws that secure the potentiometer support
bracket.
• Turn the potentiometer gear until the correct reading is achieved.
• Couple the potentiometer gear with the gear in the gearbox.
• Refit the potentiometer bracket with the previously loosened screws.
• At the end of the procedure, switch on the device and check the correct setting of the
potentiometer:
• Operating the transversal tabletop towards the outside of the table increases the
voltage on the multimeter.
• Operating the transversal tabletop towards the inside of the table decreases the
voltage on the multimeter.

1.4.2 Potentiometer ends

When moving the axis, the operator is responsible for any damage
caused by improper operation.

• Table in horizontal position, stand in centred position.

• Move the transversal tabletop inwards until it reaches the dimension B shown in Fig. 3:
dis.43482 f.7+ pag.4.
• Enter Setup mode using Tool Service (Sec.1) and acquire the end-of-stroke (sec.1.4.2.1).
• Move the transversal tabletop outwards until it reaches the dimension A shown in Fig. 3:
dis.43482 f.7+ pag.4.
• Enter Setup mode using Tool Service (Sec.1) and reacquire the end-of-stroke (sec.
1.4.2.1).

Section 4.12: transversal tabletop - rev. 1 November 2019 – page 5/6

OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.4.2.1 End-of-stroke acquisition in Setup

Acquisition of the transmission end of strokes should only be performed

when the potentiometer or its reading circuits are replaced.
If the potentiometer is uncoupled from the transmission, the
potentiometer must be calibrated again.
In addition, re-acquisition of the potentiometer after transmission
maintenance may also be necessary.

The command sequence for changing an end-of-stroke value is as follows:

• Bring the movement to the end-of-stroke to be acquired.
• Bring 25S3-Sw1.1 to ON (the "layer and tilt angle" display shows 000).
• Use buttons P34 (increment) and P35 (decrement) to select the concerned transmission
code, which is shown on the "layer" display.

TRANSVERSAL TABLETOP code 009

• Use buttons P31 or P66 (Fc min.) and P32 or P67 (Fc max.) to select the end-of-stroke to
be modified

END-OF-STROKE Minimum (table inwards) value 001

END-OF.STROKE Massimum (table outwards) value 002

• Using the remote keyboard (Fig. 1 page2), PP44B and PP44D can be used to move the
axis as desired, and PP43B to increase the speed of movement.
• Choose P33 (Enter) button to store the new value or P57 or P48 (Reset) button in case
of cancellation.
• The value shown on the display "tilting angle" in both cases reverts to the original value
000.
• Switch 25S3-Sw1.1 to OFF to exit installation.

1.4.2.2 Stop position

Check that the acquired end-of-stroke correspond to those specified in Fig. 3: dis.43482 f.7+ pag.4.
Dimension A +1/-2
Dimension B +1/-2

Section 4.12: transversal tabletop - rev. 1 November 2019 - pag. 6/6

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

Section 4.13: Compressor - rev1 November 2004

1. Compressor ..................................................................................................................................2
1.1 23S6 operation unit ..............................................................................................................2
1.1.1 Braking percentage adjustment ...................................................................................................... 2
1.1.2 I/V converter gain adjustment......................................................................................................... 3
1.1.3 Rated current adjustment................................................................................................................ 3
1.1.4 Adjustment of the Starting current output time ............................................................................... 3
1.1.5 Adjustment of the internal acceleration time maximum voltage ..................................................... 3
1.1.6 Adjustment of the Internal acceleration time slope......................................................................... 4
1.1.7 Starting current adjustment ............................................................................................................ 4
1.2 Adjustment of the compressor movement clutch.................................................................5
1.3 Adjustment of the 3FC6 microswitch (compressor in parking position).............................7
1.4 Adjustment of the 3FC7 microswitch (compression paddle)..............................................7
1.5 Adjustment of the 3FC8 microswitch (service strength) .....................................................8
1.6 Adjustment of the compression limitation .........................................................................10

Notes:

Section 4.13: Compressor - rev1 November 2004 – page 1/10

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1. Compressor
1.1 23S6 operation unit

These adjustments must be executed by qualified personnel!

The following specifications apply to the adjustments executed during
the initial testing phase of the operation unit.
The 23S6 board supplied already includes these adjustments.

Versione 52256B

JUMPERS
J1 = OFF
J2 = OFF
J3 = OFF

1.1.1 Braking percentage adjustment

P1 (on the board) – Signal present on CN3-4 Test2
Instrument used: oscilloscope 50 MHz
probe x 10, time base 1 mSec/cm, amplitude 0.2 V/cm
0v CN3-14
probe CN3-4
Adjust the P1 potentiometer so as to obtain a duty-cycle of 50 %

Section 4.13: Compressor - rev1 November 2004 - pag. 2/10

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.1.2 I/V converter gain adjustment

P2 (on the front cover of the board) - Signal present on CN1-AC4
This signal supplies a voltage that is proportional to the current inside the motor.
Instrument used: digital multimeter – electromagnetic amperometer
0v CN3-14
probe CN1-AC4
Execute an in series connection to the motor of an amperometer of the electromagnetic type
maximum value 10A
Activate the operation unit with a speed set equal to 7.5 Vcc
Adjust the P2 potentiometer so as to read a voltage value equal to the current inside the motor.

1.1.3 Rated current adjustment

P3 (on the front cover of the board) – Signal not present on the test point
Instrument used: electromagnetic amperometer – max value 10 A
Execute an in series connection to the motor of an amperometer of the electromagnetic type
maximum value 10A
Block the motor rotor.
Activate the operation unit with a speed set equal to 7.5 Vcc.
Adjust the P3 potentiometer so as to read on the amperometer the current value of 8 A.

1.1.4 Adjustment of the Starting current output time

P4 (on the board) – Signal present on CN3-8 test 6
This signal determines the time of output of the starting current (adjustment of P7); when this time
has elapsed, the operation unit delivers the current determined by the adjustment of P3.
Maximum time: 500 mS
Instrument used: oscilloscope with memory 50 MHz
probe x 10, base time 0.1 sec/cm, amplitude 0.2 V/cm
0v CN3-14
probe CN3-8 channel A
probe CN3-10 channel B
Activate the operation unit, adjust P4 so as to obtain a 300 mS ± 50 delay between the two
signals.

1.1.5 Adjustment of the internal acceleration time maximum voltage

The sequence of operations to be executed is as follows:
• Adjustment of the maximum voltage of the internal acceleration time
• Adjustment of the acceleration time slope
• Verification and possible correction of the internal acceleration time maximum voltage
• Verification and possible correction of the acceleration time slope

P6 (on the board) - Signal present on CN3-11

This adjustment is executed at the manufacturing plants
This signal determines the acceleration time maximum voltage
Instrument used: Oscilloscope 50MHz
probe x 10, base times 50 uSec/cm, amplitude 0,2 V/cm
0V CN3-14 probe CN3-11 channel A
Adjust the P6 potentiometer in order to obtain a crest value of 9.8V ±200mV.
Section 4.13: Compressor - rev1 November 2004 – page 3/10
 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.1.6 Adjustment of the Internal acceleration time slope

The sequence of operations to be executed is as follows:
• Adjustment of the maximum voltage of the internal acceleration time
• Adjustment of the acceleration time slope
• Verification and possible correction of the internal acceleration time maximum voltage
• Verification and possible correction of the acceleration time slope

P5 (on the board) – signal present on CN3-11

This signal determines the relation between the command voltage and the motor speed.
Instrument used: oscilloscope with memory 50 MHz
probe x10, base time 50 μSec/cm, amplitude 0.2 V/cm
0v CN3-14
probe CN3-11
Adjust P5 in order for the lower limit of the pulse signal to have a value of 100 mV ±50 compared
with the 0.

1.1.7 Starting current adjustment

P7 (on the board) - Signal present on CN3-7
This signal determines the maximum starting current of the operation unit.
Instrument used: digital multimeter
0v CN3-14 probe CN3-6 test 4
file the voltage present on the test point
0v CN3-14 probe CN3-7 test 5
Adjust the P7 potentiometer until you can read the same voltage read on CN3-6.

Section 4.13: Compressor - rev1 November 2004 - pag. 4/10

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

The following adjustments are executed at the manufacturing plants and

normally do not require any further modifications.
The adjustment kit code 71597 can be supplied upon request by our
Service Department offices.

1.2 Adjustment of the compressor movement clutch

Instruments used:
Dynamometer max. value 300N
Adjustment kit code 71597

• Move the tabletop to the horizontal position.

• Move the Mobile Area onto the feet-side end of stroke.
• Remove the cover (A/Fig. 1 pag.6) protecting the motor gearbox and the clutch of the
compressor support.
• In case of the removable compressor type by means of the special kit code 71597,
connect the dynamometer (max value 300 N) between the compressor knob (B/Fig. 1)
• In case of not removable parking compressor type connect the dynamometer to the
compressor arm
• With both type of compressor connect the support of the X-ray assembly (C/Fig. 1).
• Adjust the 23Az6-P2 potentiometer by completely turning it counter-clockwise so that
the intervention of the compression current limitation is avoided.
• Press the push-button commanding the descent of the compressor making the compressor
clutch intervene for a time of 4 to 5 seconds and check on the dynamometer whether the
clutch intervention strength is
• 200±30N. In case of the removable compressor type
• 270±20N In case of not removable parking compressor type
• Should it be necessary to modify the adjustment of the clutch, you shall release the
ratchet pawl of the safety washer (E/Fig. 1) inserted in the slot of the ring nut (D/Fig. 1)
and tight (in order to increase) or unloose (in order to decrease) the ring nut of the
clutch.
• You shall repeat the above-mentioned operations several times until you can obtain the
proper adjustment of the clutch.
• After completing the adjustment procedure, you shall fix again the ratchet pawl of the
safety washer (E/Fig. 1) in one of the slots of the ring nut (D/Fig. 1).
• Restore the adjustment of the compression limitation (make reference to Par.1.6).
• Fix again the cover as originally foreseen.

Section 4.13: Compressor - rev1 November 2004 – page 5/10

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

C
d

Fig. 1: dis.43482 f.10+

Fig. 2: dis.43482 f.10A+

Device composition position 1-2: nr. 1 cable cod. 70790

nr. 1 TCEI M5x25 screw
nr.1 M5 nut
nr. 2 washers internal φ5 - external φ12 -
thickness 2
Section 4.13: Compressor - rev1 November 2004 - pag. 6/10
 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.3 Adjustment of the 3FC6 microswitch (compressor in parking position)

• Move the tabletop to the horizontal position.
• Command an angle-movement of the stand compared with the SFD.
• Remove the back cover of the compressor.
• Adjust the microswitch plate.
• Verify that the led18 on the 25S3 (I/O) board is switched off: it will have to light up
when the parking position (outside the field) is reached.
• Command an ascent (upwards movement) of the compressor and check that:
the compressor stops in its parking position;
the distance between the compressor and the collimator is of 60±5mm (drawing
dis.43482 f.9+).
• Fix again the cover after completing the adjustment.
1.4 Adjustment of the 3FC7 microswitch (compression paddle)

This kind of adjustement is not present if the compressor model is not

removable

• Move the tabletop to the horizontal postion.

• Move the Mobile Area onto the right end of stroke.
• With power off:
Remove the front cover of the compressor.
Adjust the support plate in order for the 3Fc7 microswitch to get pressed when the
compression paddle is inserted.
Verify that the led19 of the 25S3 (I/O) board lights upon the microswitch intervention.
• With power ON, verify that:
the compression paddle being inserted, the compressor remains stopped and can be
commanded in both the two directions.
the compression paddle not being inserted, the compressor automatically gets back
onto its parking position.
• Fix again the cover after completing the adjustment.

Section 4.13: Compressor - rev1 November 2004 – page 7/10

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.5 Adjustment of the 3FC8 microswitch (service strength)

This adjustment can be executed after adjusting the compressor

clutch.

Instruments used:
Dynamometer max. value 300N
Adjustment kit code 71597
• Move the tabletop to the horizontal position.
• Move the Mobile Area onto the feet-side end of stroke.
• Adjust the 23Az6-P2 potentiometer by completely turning it counter-clockwise so that
the intervention of the compression limitation of the operation unit is avoided.
With the removable compressor model type:(Fig.3)
• Connect the dynamometer (max value 300 N) onto the knob of the compressor at a
distance of 150±10mm.
• Adjust the two M12 dowels ( Fig. pag.9) so as to be able to read on the dynamometer
the value of 50±10N (corresponding to a compression strength of 20±10N).
With the not removable parking compressor type (Fig.4)
• Connect the dynamometer (max value 300 N) onto the knob of the compressor at a
distance of 44±2mm. from the rotation compressor fulcrum
ƒ Adjust the nog M6 dowels (pos.A of Fig. 4-pag.9) so as to be able to read on the
dynamometer the value of 100±15 N (corresponding to a compression strength of
20±10N).

• Verify that the led20 of the 25S3 board lights up when the compression paddle is
exerting the compression, while it switches off) as soon as the compression paddle is
released.

Section 4.13: Compressor - rev1 November 2004 - pag. 8/10

OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

Fig. 3: dis.43482 f.9+

Device composition position 1: nr.1 cable cod. 70790

nr.1 TCEI M5x25 screw
nr.1 M5 nut
nr.2 washers: internal φ5 - external φ12
- thickness 2

Section 4.13: Compressor - rev1 November 2004 – page 9/10

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.6 Adjustment of the compression limitation

This adjustment can be executed after executing the adjustments of

both the compressor clutch and the service strength of the compressor.

Instruments used:
Dynamometer max. value 300N
Adjustment kit code 71597

• Move the tabletop to the horizontal position.

• Move the Mobile Area onto the feet-side end of stroke.
• Remove the cover (A/Fig. 1 pag.6) protecting the motor gearbx and the clutch of the
compressor support
• Connect the dynamometer (max value 300 N) onto the knob of the compressor (B/Fig. 1)
and the X-ray housing support (C/Fig. 1 ) by means of the special kit code 71597.
• Press the push-button commanding the descent (downwards movement) making the
compression current limitation intervene and check on the dynamometer whether the
intervention strength of the clutch is of 150±10N.
• Adjust the 23Az6-P2 potentiometer by completely turning it clockwise in order to obtain
the proper adjustment.
• Fix again the cover after completing the adjustment.

Section 4.13: Compressor - rev1 November 2004 - pag. 10/10

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

Section 4.14: Parallel diaphagms - rev. 2 November 2015

1. Parallel diaphragms ...................................................................................................................... 2

1.1 24S2 operation unit .............................................................................................................. 2
1.1.1 Fundamental settings ...................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 Verification of the transmission movement direction .......................................................... 4
1.2.1 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 4
1.3 Position of the 3FC16 reference photocell ........................................................................... 5
1.3.1 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 5
1.4 Diaphragms centering and symmetry .................................................................................. 6
1.5 Diaphragms aperture ............................................................................................................ 7
1.6 Setup..................................................................................................................................... 8
1.7 Verification of the X-ray beam ............................................................................................ 8

Notes:

Section 4.14: Parallel diaphagms - rev. 2 November 2015 – page 1/8

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1. Parallel diaphragms

Diaphragms presence depends on the type of SFD installed.

1.1 24S2 operation unit

GMH02/06 type – operation unit for step-by-step motors

BEFORE REMOVING THE OPERATION UNIT FROM THE

RACK YOU SHALL MAKE SURE THAT THE LEDS ON THE
FRONT COVER ARE SWITCHED OFF.
DO NOT EXECUTE ANY SELECTIONS/ADJUSTMENTS WHEN
THE EQUIPMENT IS SWITCHED ON.

1.1.1 Fundamental settings

The fundamental settings must be executed by the Service Department

of GMM, or by qualified personnel being authorised by GMM, during
the installation or interventions of replacement, according to the kind
of motor and its application.
Wrong settings may determine failures and damages, as well as a
possible improper functioning.

a) GMH02/06 type – operation unit for step-by-step motors cod.55322

Section 4.14: Parallel diaphagms - rev. 2 November 2015 - pag. 2/8

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

b) GMH06 type – operation unit for step-by-step motors cod.55322A.

JUMPERS
Verify the following settings:

DRF : CLOSED ( ON )
END OF STROKE: OPENED ( OFF )
DO/UP: CLOSED on UP (NPN inputs ON)
12/5: CLOSED on 12 ( inputs operating at 12V ON )

The DO/UP and 12/5 jumpers must be positioned onto one of the two possible
positions: different combinations determine the non-functioning of the operation unit.

DIP-SWITCHES
Verify the following settings:

THE OPERATION UNIT DOES NOT NEED ANY ADJUSTMENTS

Section 4.14: Parallel diaphagms - rev. 2 November 2015 – page 3/8

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.2 Verification of the transmission movement direction

During this phase the axis movements are free and not subject to the
software control.
Pay your best attention while moving the axis in this situation!

• Verify the movement direction according to the Setup modality (Section 1 page 2).
• Switch on the equipment while the Setup modality is selected.
• Verify the correct movement direction.
• Through the opposite movement check the wirings of the motor phases (drawing
dis.55169 f.10+).

1.2.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for verifying the direction of the parallel diaphragms
transmission is as follows:
• Power ON: enter the Installation while moving the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of
the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the wanted transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).

PARALLEL DIAPHRAGMS TRANSMISSION MOVEMENT code 067

• By means of P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max end of stroke) push-
buttons you can select the transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “Tilting
angle” display).

VERIFICATION OF THE MOVEMENT DIRECTION value 002

• By means of the remote keyboard, verify that by pressing the P44D (outwards transversal
tabletop) push-button the diaphragms open and that by pressing the P44B (inwards
transversal tabletop) push-button the diaphragms close.
• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 OR P48 (Reset) push-button if you do
not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.

PP44B

PP44D

Section 4.14: Parallel diaphagms - rev. 2 November 2015 - pag. 4/8

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.3 Position of the 3FC16 reference photocell

The equipment being switched off, you shall verify that the photocell window is mechanically
centered compared with the diaphragms (rif. Fig. 1 pag.6).

The equipment being switched on, you shall verify the proper stop onto the photocell according to
the Setup procedure (Section 1 page 2).

1.3.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for verifying the stop onto the zero end-of-stroke of the
parallel diaphragms is as follows:
• Power ON: enter the Installation while moving the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of
the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the wanted transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).

PARALLEL DIAPHRAGMS TRANSMISSION MOVEMENT code 067

• By means of P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max end of stroke) push-
buttons you can select the transmission movement with stop on the ends-of-strokes (this
will be visualised on the “Tilting angle” display).

END OF STROKE VERIFICATION value 001

• By means of the remote keyboard, verify that the P44D (outwards transversal tabletop)
push-button and P44B (inwards transversal tabletop) push-button command the
movement of the axis in both directions with stop onto the end of stroke.
• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 or P48 (Reset) push-button if you do not
want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

Section 4.14: Parallel diaphagms - rev. 2 November 2015 – page 5/8

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.4 Diaphragms centering and symmetry

• Select an aperture of the diaphragms equal to the large field of the I.I.
• Switch off the equipment.
• Execute the measures and calculations according to what specified here below.
• Should the results pass the allowed tolerances, you shall execute the mechanical
adjustment of the diaphragms.

Symmetry : (A-C)+(B-D) = max.±0.5

Centering: [(A+C)-(B+D)]/4 = max.±0.5
Parallelism: (A+B)-(C+D) = max. 1mm difference between the two ends of the blades.

Fig. 1: dis.43482 f.11+

Section 4.14: Parallel diaphagms - rev. 2 November 2015 - pag. 6/8

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.5 Diaphragms aperture

FFD
This value represents the Focus-to-film distance where the verification is executed.

DIVISION SIZE
This defines the cassette dimension and the division size to be chosen.

STANDARD APERTURE
This defines the value calculated between two spaces, corresponding to the mechanical value that
determines between the diaphragms blades.
A 3mm-space is considered between the divisions.

APERTURES
• Verify that the actual apertures correspond to the standard apertures.
• Should not the measured apertures be within the allowed tolerances, you shall execute
the diaphragms adjustment according to what specified in the Setup procedure (Section
page 2).
• Execute the measure between the two ends of the blades.

FFD (in cm) CASSETTE SIZE STANDARD APERTURE

18/1 169.4±1 mm
18/4 40.2±1 mm
43/1 408.8±1 mm
115 43/4 100±1 mm
7” 167.3±1 mm
7”/4 39.7±1 mm
17” 410.5±1 mm
17”/4 100.4±1 mm

Enter the Setup modality (Section 1 page 2) and select code 016 value 002
in order to verify the diaphragms apertures with cassettes in inches.

Section 4.14: Parallel diaphagms - rev. 2 November 2015 – page 7/8

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.6 Setup
The sequence of commands to be carried out for executing the fine adjustment of the parallel
diaphragms is as follows:
• Verify the apertures of the parallel diaphragms and define the correction value to be used
for modifying the spaces between the divisions. Note that the modification of the value of
code 051 determines the modification of the mechanical apertures of the diaphragms
and, as a consequence, the spaces between the different exposures will decrease.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of the control panel applying to the “layer
height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the wanted transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).

DIAPHRAGMS SPACES ADJUSTMENT code 051

• By means of P31 OR P66 (decrease) and P32 OR P67 (increase) push-buttons you can
select the value to be modified. Each number corresponds to 0.1 mm of aperture (this
value will be visualised on the “Tilting angle” display).

The default value 051 allows an aperture of the diaphragms of 169.4±1mm

with spaces of 3mm on the 18x24 cassette in full size.
If you select value 021 (30 numbers having default value = -3 mm) you
will get an aperture of 173mm with spaces of 1mm.
If you select value 081 (30 numbers having default value = +3 mm) you
will get an aperture of 167mm with spaces of 5mm.

• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 OR P48(Reset) push-button if you do

not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.
1.7 Verification of the X-ray beam
The following adjustments require X-ray emissions. You shall take
adequate precautions in order to prevent anyone and any part of your
body from being directly or indirectly exposed to X-rays.
• Before executing the radiography you shall verify the apertures according to what
specified in par. 1.5.
• Execute a radiography with size 18/4 and 43/1 and verify that the spaces between the
divisions are of 3±1mm.
• Should their value be out of the allowed tolerances, you shall execute the fine adjustment
of the diaphragms according to the Setup procedure (section 1page 2).

Section 4.14: Parallel diaphagms - rev. 2 November 2015 - pag. 8/8

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Section 4.15: Crossed diaphagms - rev. 2 November 2015

1. Crossed diaphragms ..................................................................................................................... 2

1.1 24S3 operation unit .............................................................................................................. 2
1.1.1 Fundamental settings ...................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 Verification of the transmission movement direction .......................................................... 4
1.2.1 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 4
1.3 Position of the 3FC17 reference photocell ........................................................................... 5
1.3.1 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 5
1.4 Diaphragms centering .......................................................................................................... 6
1.5 Setup..................................................................................................................................... 7
1.6 Verification of the X-ray beam ............................................................................................ 7

Notes:

Section 4.15: Crossed diaphagms - rev. 2 November 2015 – page 1/8

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1. Crossed diaphragms

Crossed diaphragms presence depends on the SFD type installed.

Crossed diaphragms transmission is not present on systems with 180cm FD and double grids. In
such a case, the transmission is used to move the second grid.

1.1 24S3 operation unit

GMH02/06 type – operation unit for step-by-step motors.

BEFORE REMOVING THE OPERATION UNIT FROM THE RACK YOU

SHALL MAKE SURE THAT THE LEDS ON THE FRONT COVER ARE
SWITCHED OFF. DO NOT EXECUTE ANY SETTINGS WHEN THE
EQUIPMENT IS SWITCHED ON.

1.1.1 Fundamental settings

The fundamental settings must be executed by the Service Department of

GMM, or by qualified personnel being authorised by GMM, during the
installation or interventions of replacement, according to the kind of motor
and its application.
Wrong settings may determine failures and damages, as well as a possible
improper functioning.

a) GMH02/06 type – operation unit for step-by-step motors cod.55322.

Section 4.15: Crossed diaphagms - rev. 2 November 2015 - pag. 2/8

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

b) GMH06 type – operation unit for step-by-step motors cod.55322A.

JUMPERS
Verify the following settings

DRF : CLOSED ( ON )
END OF STROKE: OPENED ( OFF )
DO/UP: CLOSED on UP (NPN inputs ON)
12/5: CLOSED on 12 (Inputs operating at 12V ON)

The DO/UP and 12/5 jumpers must be positioned onto one of the two possible
positions: different combinations determine the non-functioning of the operation unit.

DIP-SWITCHES
Verify the following settings

THIS OPERATION UNIT DOES NOT NEED ANY ADJUSTMENTS

Section 4.15: Crossed diaphagms - rev. 2 November 2015 – page 3/8
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.2 Verification of the transmission movement direction

During this phase the axis movements are free and not subject to the
software control.
Pay your best attention while moving the axis in this situation!

• Verify the movement direction according to the Setup modality (Section 1 page 2).
• Switch on the equipment while the Setup modality is selected.
• Verify the correct movement direction.
• Through the opposite movement check the wirings of the motor phases (drawing
dis.55169 f.11+).

1.2.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for verifying the direction of the parallel diaphragms
transmission is as follows:
• Power ON: enter the Installation while moving the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of
the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the wanted transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).

CROSSED DIAPHRAGMS TRANSMISSION MOVEMENT code 070

• By means of P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max end of stroke) push-
buttons you can select the transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “Tilting
angle” display).

VERIFICATION OF THE MOVEMENT DIRECTION value 002

• By means of the remote keyboard, verify that by pressing the P44D (outwards transversal
tabletop) push-button the crossed diaphragm gets onto the field and that by pressing the
P44B (inwards transversal tabletop) push-button the crossed diaphragm gets outside the
field (parking position).
• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 OR P48(Reset) push-button if you do
not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.
PP44B

PP44D

Section 4.15: Crossed diaphagms - rev. 2 November 2015 - pag. 4/8

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.3 Position of the 3FC17 reference photocell

The equipment being switched off, you shall verify that the photocell window is mechanically
centered compared with the crossed diaphragms (ref. Fig. 1 page 6).

The equipment being switched on, you shall verify the proper stop onto the photocell according to
the Setup procedure (Section 1 page 2).

1.3.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for verifying the stop onto the zero end-of-stroke of the
crossed-diaphragms is as follows:
• Power ON: enter the Installation while moving the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of
the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the wanted transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).

CROSSED DIAPHRAGMS TRANSMISSION MOVEMENT code 070

• By means of P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max end of stroke) push-
buttons you can select the transmission movement with stop on the ends-of-strokes (this
will be visualised on the “Tilting angle” display).

END OF STROKE VERIFICATION value 001

• By means of the remote keyboard, verify that the P44D (outwards transversal tabletop)
push-button and P44B (inwards transversal tabletop) push-button command the
movement of the axis in both directions with stop onto the end of stroke.
• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 or P48(Reset) push-button if you do not
want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

Section 4.15: Crossed diaphagms - rev. 2 November 2015 – page 5/8

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.4 Diaphragms centering

• Insert a 18x24 cm cassette and select a crossed division per 4

• Verify that the distance between the parking position and the X-ray area is equal to
617±2mm.
• Insert a 24x30 cm cassette and select a crossed division per 4
• Verify that the distance between the parking position and the X-ray area is equal to
472±2mm.
• Should their value be out of the allowed tolerances, you shall execute the fine adjustment
of the diaphragms according to the Setup procedure (section 1page 2).

Fig. 1: dis. 43482 f.12+

With cassette in cm the dimensions A – B in Fig. 1 are equal to 87±0.3mm

and 116±0.3mm respectively.
With cassette in inches the dimensions A – B in Fig. 1 are equal to
98±0.3mm and 117±0.3mm respectively.

Section 4.15: Crossed diaphagms - rev. 2 November 2015 - pag. 6/8

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.5 Setup
The sequence of commands to be carried out for executing the fine adjustment of the crossed
diaphragms is as follows:
• Verify the excursion of the crossed diaphragms and define the correction value to be used
for the modification. Note that the modification of the value of code 053 determines the
modification of the mechanical excursions of the diaphragms and, as a consequence, the
spaces between the different exposures will decrease.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of the control panel applying to the “layer
height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the wanted transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).

CROSSED DIAPHRAGMS EXCURSION CORRECTION code 053

• By means of P31 OR P66 (decrease) and P32 OR P67 (increase) push-buttons you can
select the value to be modified. Each number corresponds to 0.1 mm of aperture (this
value will be visualised on the “Tilting angle” display).

The default value 005 allows an excursion of the diaphragms of 472±2mm

on a 18x24cm cassette in division per 4.
If you select value 001 (4 numbers having default value = -4 mm) you will
get an excursion of the diaphragms of 468 mm.
If you select value 009 (4 numbers having default value = +4 mm) you will
get an excursion of the diaphragms of 476 mm.

• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 orP48 (Reset) push-button if you do not
want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.

1.6 Verification of the X-ray beam

The following adjustments require X-ray emission. You shall take
adequate precautions in order to prevent anyone and any part of your
body from being directly or indirectly exposed to X-ray emissions.
• Before executing the radiography you shall verify the excursions according to what
specified in par. 1.4 and verify the adjustment of the parallel diaphragms (Section 4.14).
• Execute a radiography with size 18 and 24 and division per 4 and verify that the spaces
between the divisions are of 3±1mm.

The transversal side of the divisions is subject to the diaphragm’s mechanics.

Section 4.15: Crossed diaphagms - rev. 2 November 2015 – page 7/8

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

blank page

Section 4.15: Crossed diaphagms - rev. 2 November 2015 - pag. 8/8

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

Section 4.16: Grid - rev. 2 November 2015

1. Grid .............................................................................................................................................. 2
1.1 24S4 operation unit .............................................................................................................. 2
1.1.1 Fundamental settings ...................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 Verification of the transmission movement direction .......................................................... 4
1.2.1 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 4
1.3 Position of the 3FC18 reference photocell ........................................................................... 5
1.3.1 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 5
1.4 Grid centering and symmetry............................................................................................... 6
1.5 Setup..................................................................................................................................... 7
2. Second Grid ................................................................................................................................. 8
2.1 24S3 operation unit .............................................................................................................. 8
2.1.1 Fundamental settings ...................................................................................................................... 8
2.2 Verification of the transmission movement direction ........................................................ 10
2.2.1 Setup ............................................................................................................................................. 10
2.3 Position of the 3FC17 reference photocell ......................................................................... 11
2.3.1 Setup ............................................................................................................................................. 11
2.4 Grid centering and symmetry............................................................................................. 12
2.5 Setup................................................................................................................................... 13
3. Manual grid ................................................................................................................................ 13

Notes:

Section 4.16: Grid - rev. 2 November 2015 – page 1/14

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1. Grid

Grid type and number depend on the SFD type installed.

Grids transmissions are not present on systems with SFD with manual grids.

1.1 24S4 operation unit

GMH02/06 type – operation unit for step-by-step motors.

BEFORE REMOVING THE OPERATION UNIT FROM THE

RACK YOU SHALL MAKE SURE THAT THE LEDS ON THE
FRONT COVER ARE SWITCHED OFF.
DO NOT EXECUTE ANY SETTINGS WHEN THE EQUIPMENT IS
SWITCHED ON.

1.1.1 Fundamental settings

The fundamental settings must be executed by the Service Department of

GMM, or by qualified personnel being authorised by GMM, during the
installation or interventions of replacement, according to the kind of motor
and its application.
Wrong settings may determine failures and damages, as well as a possible
improper functioning.

a) GMH02/06 type – operation unit for step-by-step motors cod.55322.

Section 4.16: Grid - rev. 2 November 2015 - pag. 2/14

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

b) GMH06 type – operation unit for step-by-step motors cod.55322A.

JUMPERS
Verify the following settings:

DRF : CLOSED ( ON )
END OF STROKE: OPENED ( OFF )
DO/UP: CLOSED on UP (NPN inputs ON)
12/5: CLOSED on 12 (Inputs operating at 12V ON)

The DO/UP and 12/5 jumpers must be positioned onto one of the two possible positions:
different combinations determine the non-functioning of the operation unit.

DIP-SWITCHES
Verify the following settings

THE OPERATION UNIT DOES NOT REQUIRE ANY ADJUSTMENTS

Section 4.16: Grid - rev. 2 November 2015 – page 3/14
 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.2 Verification of the transmission movement direction

During this phase the axis movements are free and not subject to the
software control.
Pay your best attention while moving the axis in this situation!

• Verify the movement direction according to the Setup modality (Section 1 page 2).
• Switch on the equipment while the Setup modality is selected.
• Verify the correct movement direction.
• Through the opposite movement check the wirings of the motor phases (drawing
dis.55169 f.12+).

1.2.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for verifying the direction of the grid transmission is as
follows:
• Power ON: enter the Installation while moving the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of
the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the wanted transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).

GRID TRANSMISSION MOVEMENT code 069

• By means of P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max end of stroke) push-
buttons you can select the transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “Tilting
angle” display).

VERIFICATION OF THE MOVEMENT DIRECTION value 002

• By means of the remote keyboard, verify that by pressing the P44D (outwards transversal
tabletop) push-button the grid moves towards the X-ray field and that by pressing the
P44B (inwards transversal tabletop) push-button the grid moves towards the parking
position.
• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 OR P48(Reset) push-button if you do
not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

PP44B

PP44D

Section 4.16: Grid - rev. 2 November 2015 - pag. 4/14

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.3 Position of the 3FC18 reference photocell

• The equipment being switched off, you shall verify that the photocell window is
mechanically centered compared with the grid (rif. Fig. 1 pag.6).

The equipment being switched on, you shall verify the proper stop onto the photocell according to
the Setup procedure (Section 1 page 2).

1.3.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for verifying the stop onto the zero end-of-stroke of the
grid is as follows:
• Power ON: enter the Installation while moving the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of
the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the wanted transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).

GRID TRANSMISSION MOVEMENT code 069

• By means of P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max end of stroke) push-
buttons you can select the transmission movement with stop on the ends-of-strokes (this
will be visualised on the “Tilting angle” display).

END OF STROKE VERIFICATION value 001

• By means of the remote keyboard, verify that the P44D (outwards transversal tabletop)
push-button and P44B (inwards transversal tabletop) push-button command the
movement of the axis in both directions with stop onto the end of stroke.
• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 OR P48(Reset) push-button if you do
not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

Section 4.16: Grid - rev. 2 November 2015 – page 5/14

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

1.4 Grid centering and symmetry

• Mount the grid.
• Use a nylon thread that shall be secured onto the central blocks of the SFD.
• Switch off the light inside the X-ray room and switch on the collimator light.
• Verify the symmetry and centering of the grid compared with the centre point of the
SFD.
• Verify the distance between the parking area and the X-ray field: the distance must be
equal to B±1mm.
• Should this value be out of the allowed tolerances, you shall execute the fine adjustment
of the grid according to the Setup procedure (section 1page 2).

Fig. 1: dis. 43482 f.13+

Standard SFD
Standard excursion Long excursion
grid grid
A 418±1 418±1
B 404±1 454±1
SFD with fixed detectors
A 418±1
B 434±1

Section 4.16: Grid - rev. 2 November 2015 - pag. 6/14

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

1.5 Setup
The sequence of commands to be carried out for executing the fine adjustment of the grid is as
follows:
• Verify the excursion of the grid and define the correction value to be used for the
modification.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of the control panel applying to the “layer
height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the wanted transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).

GRID EXCURSION CORRECTION code 054

• By means of P31 OR P66 (decrease) and P32 OR P67 (increase) push-buttons you can
select the value to be modified. Each number corresponds to 0.1 mm of aperture (this
value will be visualised on the “Tilting angle” display).

The default value 051 allows a grid excursion of B±1mm from the X-ray
area to the parking area, e.g. if B = 404mm:
If you select value 021 (30 numbers having default value = -3 mm) you
will get an excursion of the grid of 401 mm.
If you select value 081 (30 numbers having default value = +3 mm) you
will get an excursion of the grid of 407 mm.

• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 OR P48 (Reset) push-button if you do
not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display in both cases will go back to the
original value 000 with the button pressed and to the latest value saved when the button
is released.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

Section 4.16: Grid - rev. 2 November 2015 – page 7/14

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

2. Second Grid

The second grid is generally present on systems with 180cm FD.

It is installed as alternative to crossed diaphragms and it uses their
transmission.

2.1 24S3 operation unit

GMH02/06 type – operation unit for step-by-step motors.

BEFORE REMOVING THE OPERATION UNIT FROM THE RACK YOU

SHALL MAKE SURE THAT THE LEDS ON THE FRONT COVER ARE
SWITCHED OFF.
DO NOT EXECUTE ANY SETTINGS WHEN THE EQUIPMENT IS
SWITCHED ON.

2.1.1 Fundamental settings

The fundamental settings must be executed by the Service Department

of GMM, or by qualified personnel being authorised by GMM, during
the installation or interventions of replacement, according to the kind
of motor and its application.
Wrong settings may determine failures and damages, as well as a
possible improper functioning.

c) GMH02/06 type – operation unit for step-by-step motors cod.55322.

Section 4.16: Grid - rev. 2 November 2015 - pag. 8/14

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

b) GMH06 type – operation unit for step-by-step motors cod.55322A.

JUMPERS
Verify the following settings:

DRF : CLOSED ( ON )
END OF STROKE: OPENED ( OFF )
DO/UP: CLOSED on UP (NPN inputs ON)
12/5: CLOSED on 12 (Inputs operating at 12V ON)

The DO/UP and 12/5 jumpers must be positioned onto one of the two possible positions:
different combinations determine the non-functioning of the operation unit.

DIP-SWITCHES
Verify the following settings

THE OPERATION UNIT DOES NOT REQUIRE ANY ADJUSTMENTS

Section 4.16: Grid - rev. 2 November 2015 – page 9/14

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

2.2 Verification of the transmission movement direction

During this phase the axis movements are free and not subject to the
software control.
Pay your best attention while moving the axis in this situation!

• Verify the movement direction according to the Setup modality (Section 1 page 2).
• Switch on the equipment while the Setup modality is selected.
• Verify the correct movement direction.
• Through the opposite movement check the wirings of the motor phases (drawing dis.55169
f.11+).

2.2.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for verifying the direction of the grid transmission is as
follows:
• Power ON: enter the Installation while moving the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of the
control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the code for

the wanted transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer height” display).

SECOND GRID TRANSMISSION MOVEMENT code 070

• By means of P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max end of stroke) push-
buttons you can select the transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “Tilting angle”
display).

VERIFICATION OF THE MOVEMENT DIRECTION value 002

• By means of the remote keyboard, verify that by pressing the P44D (outwards transversal
tabletop) push-button the grid moves towards the X-ray field and that by pressing the P44B
(inwards transversal tabletop) push-button the grid moves towards the parking position.
• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 OR P48(Reset) push-button if you do not want
to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in both
cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

PP44B

PP44D

Section 4.16: Grid - rev. 2 November 2015 - pag. 10/14

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

2.3 Position of the 3FC17 reference photocell

• The equipment being switched off, you shall verify that the photocell window is
mechanically centered compared with the grid (rif. Fig. 1 pag.6).

The equipment being switched on, you shall verify the proper stop onto the photocell according to
the Setup procedure (Section 1 page 2).

2.3.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for verifying the stop onto the zero end-of-stroke of the
grid is as follows:
• Power ON: enter the Installation while moving the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of
the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the wanted transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).

GRID TRANSMISSION MOVEMENT code 070

• By means of P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max end of stroke) push-
buttons you can select the transmission movement with stop on the ends-of-strokes (this
will be visualised on the “Tilting angle” display).

END OF STROKE VERIFICATION value 001

• By means of the remote keyboard, verify that the P44D (outwards transversal tabletop)
push-button and P44B (inwards transversal tabletop) push-button command the
movement of the axis in both directions with stop onto the end of stroke.
• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 OR P48(Reset) push-button if you do
not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

Section 4.16: Grid - rev. 2 November 2015 – page 11/14

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

2.4 Grid centering and symmetry

• Mount the grid.
• Use a nylon thread that shall be secured onto the central blocks of the SFD.
• Switch off the light inside the X-ray room and switch on the collimator light.
• Verify the symmetry and centering of the grid compared with the centre point of the
SFD.
• Verify the distance between the parking area and the X-ray field: the distance must be
equal to B±1mm.
• Should this value be out of the allowed tolerances, you shall execute the fine adjustment
of the grid according to the Setup procedure (section 1 page 2).

Fig. 2: dis. 43482 f.13+

Standard SFD
Standard excursion Long excursion
grid grid
A 418±1 418±1
B 404±1 454±1
SFD with fixed detectors
A 418±1
B 434±1

Section 4.16: Grid - rev. 2 November 2015 - pag. 12/14

 OPERA T – Adjustment Manual

2.5 Setup
The sequence of commands to be carried out for executing the fine adjustment of the grid is as
follows:
• Verify the excursion of the grid and define the correction value to be used for the
modification.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of the control panel applying to the “layer
height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the wanted transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).

SECOND GRID EXCURSION CORRECTION code 053

• By means of P31 OR P66 (decrease) and P32 OR P67 (increase) push-buttons you can
select the value to be modified. Each number corresponds to 0.1 mm of aperture (this
value will be visualised on the “Tilting angle” display).

The default value 051 allows a grid excursion of B±1mm from the X-ray
area to the parking area, e.g. if B = 404mm:
If you select value 021 (30 numbers having default value = -3 mm) you
will get an excursion of the grid of 401 mm.
If you select value 081 (30 numbers having default value = +3 mm) you
will get an excursion of the grid of 407 mm.

• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 OR P48 (Reset) push-button if you do
not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display in both cases will go back to the
original value 000 with the button pressed and to the latest value saved when the button
is released.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

3. Manual grid

For SFDs with manual grids the grid presence and the type of focalization
are defined by microswitches placed in the SFD which do not need any
adjustments.

Section 4.16: Grid - rev. 2 November 2015 – page 13/14

 OPERA T - Adjustment Manual

Blank page

Section 4.16: Grid - rev. 2 November 2015 - pag. 14/14

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

Section 4.17: Longitudinal cassette-holder - rev. 3 November 2015

1. Longitudinal cassette holder ........................................................................................................ 2

1.1 24S6 operation unit .............................................................................................................. 2
1.1.1 Fundamental settings ...................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 Verification of the transmission movement direction .......................................................... 6
1.2.1 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 6
1.3 Position of the 3Fc14 reference photocell........................................................................... 7
1.3.1 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 7
1.4 Cassette-holder centering ..................................................................................................... 8
1.5 Setup..................................................................................................................................... 9
1.6 Verification of the X-ray beam .......................................................................................... 10

Notes:

Section 4.17: Longitudinal cassette-holder - rev. 3 November 2015 – page 1/10

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1. Longitudinal cassette holder

The presence of the longitudinal cassette holder depends on the SFD type
installed.

1.1 24S6 operation unit

GMD04 type – operation unit for step-by-step motors 400 step/revolution
GMH09 type- operation unit for step by step 3200step/revolution

All the equipments before the SW version V08 are made with the GMD04
step by step operation unit.
From V08 SW version, all the equipments are made with the GMH09 step
by step operation unit.The operation unit GMH09 can replace the GMD04
if set to 400 step/revolution (1/4 of step).
The equipmens with the operation unit GMD04 can be up dated with the
GMH09 operation unit, set to 3200 step/revolution by using the proper kit.

BEFORE REMOVING THE OPERATION UNIT FROM THE

RACK YOU SHALL MAKE SURE THAT THE LEDS ON THE
FRONT COVER ARE SWITCHED OFF.
DO NOT EXECUTE ANY SELECTIONS/ADJUSTMENTS WHEN
THE EQUIPMENT IS SWITCHED ON.

1.1.1 Fundamental settings

The fundamental settings must be executed by the Service Department

of GMM, or by qualified personnel being authorised by GMM, during
the installation or interventions of replacement, according to the kind
of motor and its application.
Wrong settings may determine failures and damages, as well as a
possible improper functioning.

Section 4.17: Longitudinal cassette-holder - rev. 3 November 2015 - pag. 2/10

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

a) GMD04 type-operation unit for step by step motor cod. 39727

JUMPERS
Verify the following settings:

DRF: CLOSED
FC: OPENED

DIP-SWITCHES
Verify the following settings:

Section 4.17: Longitudinal cassette-holder - rev. 3 November 2015 – page 3/10

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

b) GMH09 type - operation unit for step by step motor cod. 55903

c) GMH09 type - operation unit for step by step motor cod. 55903A

JUMPERS
Verify the following settings:

DRF: CLOSED
FC: OPENED
DO/UP: CLOSED on UP (ON input NPN)
12/5: CLOSED on 12 (ON working in input at12V)
Section 4.17: Longitudinal cassette-holder - rev. 3 November 2015 - pag. 4/10
 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

The jumpers DO/UP and 12/5 must be put in one or the other possible
position. The operation unit doesn’t work in case of different jumpers
conbinations.

DIP -SWITCHES
Verify the following settings:

Standard Configuration Configuration to replace GMD04 operation unit

6,7A 6,7A
Equalizzazione Equalizzazione

¼ passo
3200 passi
400 passi

BOTH THE OPERATION UNITS DO NOT REQUIRE ANY ADJUSTMENT

Section 4.17: Longitudinal cassette-holder - rev. 3 November 2015 – page 5/10

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1.2 Verification of the transmission movement direction

During this phase the axis movements are free and not subject to the
software control.
Pay your best attention while moving the axis in this situation!

• Verify the movement direction according to the Setup modality (Section 1 page 2).
• Switch on the equipment while the Setup modality is selected.
• Verify the correct movement direction.
• Through the opposite movement check the wirings of the motor phases.

1.2.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for verifying the direction of the cassette-holder
transmission is as follows:
• Power ON: enter the Installation while moving the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of
the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the wanted transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).
LONGITUDINAL CASSETTE-HOLDER TRANSMISSION MOVEMENT code 068
• By means of P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max end of stroke) push-
buttons you can select the transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “Tilting
angle” display).

VERIRIFICATION OF THE MOVEMENT DIRECTION value 002

• By means of the remote keyboard, verify that by pressing the P44D (outwards transversal
tabletop) push-button the cassette-holder moves towards the loading position and that by
pressing the P44B (inwards transversal tabletop) push-button the cassette-holder moves
towards the parking position.
• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 OR P48(Reset) push-button if you do
not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.
PP44B

PP44D

Section 4.17: Longitudinal cassette-holder - rev. 3 November 2015 - pag. 6/10

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1.3 Position of the 3Fc14 reference photocell

The equipment being switched off, you shall:
• Verify that the photocell window is mechanically centered compared with the
longitudinal cassette-holder (rif. Fig. 1 pag.8).

The equipment being switched on, you shall:

- verify the proper stop onto the photocell according to the Setup procedure (Sect.1 page 2)

1.3.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for verifying the stop onto the zero end-of-stroke of the
cassette-holder is as follows:
• Power ON: enter the Installation while moving the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of
the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the wanted transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).

LONGITUDINAL CASSETTE-HOLDER TRANSMISSION MOVEMENT code 068

• By means of P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max end of stroke) push-
buttons you can select the transmission movement with stop on the ends-of-strokes (this
will be visualised on the “Tilting angle” display).

END OF STROKE VERIFICATION value 001

• By means of the remote keyboard, verify that the P44D (outwards transversal tabletop)
push-button and P44B (inwards transversal tabletop) push-button command the
movement of the axis in both directions with stop onto the end of stroke.
• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 OR P48 (Reset) push-button if you do
not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

Section 4.17: Longitudinal cassette-holder - rev. 3 November 2015 – page 7/10

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1.4 Cassette-holder centering

• Secure a 0.5 mm diameter-steel string onto the central point of the SFD by using the
special reference blocks.
• Mark the centre of the cassette on 18x24cm and 43x35 cm sizes.
• Execute a Preparation with both the 18cm and the 43 cm cassettes.
• Switch off the equipment (power off) and wait 30 seconds.
• Switch off the light of the room and wait for the collimator light to switch on.
• By means of the collimator light projection, you shall verify that the centre of the cassette
corresponds to the centre of the SFD.
• Should this value be out of the allowed tolerances, you shall execute the fine adjustment
of the cassette-holder centering according to the Setup procedure (section 1 page 2).

Fig. 1: dis.43482 f.14+

Section 4.17: Longitudinal cassette-holder - rev. 3 November 2015 - pag. 8/10

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1.5 Setup
The sequence of commands to be carried out for executing the fine adjustment of the cassette
centre with the central area of the SFD is as follows:
• Verify the excursion of the cassette-holder and define the correction value to be used for
the modification. Note: The modification of the value of code 052 will involve the
modification of the mechanical excursion of the longitudinal cassette-holder.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of the control panel applying to the “layer
height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the wanted transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).

CASSETTE-HOLDER EXCURSION CORRECTION code 052

• By means of P31 OR P66 (decrease) and P32 OR P67 (increase) push-buttons you can
select the value to be modified. Each number corresponds to 0.1 mm-displacement (this
value will be visualised on the “Tilting angle” display).

The default value 051 allows a cassette-holder excursion of 454±1mm

from the loading position to the parking position.
If you select value 021 (30 numbers having default value = -3 mm) you
will get an excursion of the cassette-holder of 451 mm.
If you select value 081 (30 numbers having default value = +3 mm) you
will get an excursion of the cassette-holder of 457 mm.

• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 OR P48(Reset) push-button if you do

not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

Section 4.17: Longitudinal cassette-holder - rev. 3 November 2015 – page 9/10

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1.6 Verification of the X-ray beam

The following adjustments require X-ray emissions. You shall take

adequate precautions in order to prevent anyone and any part of your
body from being directly or indirectly exposed to X-rays.

•Before executing the radiography you shall verify the excursions according to what
specified in par. 1.4 page 8.
- Place a washer on the centre of the cassette (rif. Fig. 2 page 10).
- Position the template code 55416 for the cassette centering onto the diaphragms. (rif.
Fig. 3 page 10).
• Execute a radiography with size 24x30 cm and division per 4 and verify the centering
of the cassette-holder (rif. Fig. 4 page 10): the projection of the washer must coincide
with the hole present on the template.

Lato caricamento

Fig. 2: Position of the washer on the cassette Fig. 3: Position of the template cod.55416

Fig. 4:Result of the cassette-holder centering

Section 4.17: Longitudinal cassette-holder - rev. 3 November 2015 - pag. 10/10

Opera T – Adjustment Manual

Section 4.18: Transversal casette-holder - rev. 3 November 2015

1. Transversal cassette-holder .......................................................................................................... 2

1.1 24S8 operation unit .............................................................................................................. 2
1.1.1 Fundamental settings ...................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 Verification of the transmission movement direction .......................................................... 6
1.2.1 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 6
1.3 Position of the 3Fc15 and 3Fc21 reference photocells ........................................................ 7
1.3.1 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 7
1.4 Cassette-holder centering ..................................................................................................... 8
1.5 Setup..................................................................................................................................... 9
1.6 Verification of the X-ray beam .......................................................................................... 10

Notes:

Section 4.18: Transversal casette-holder - rev. 3 November 2015 page 1/10

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1. Transversal cassette-holder

The presence of the transversal cassette holder depends on the SFD type
installed.

1.1 24S8 operation unit

GMD04 type – operation unit for step-by-step motors 400step/revolution
GMH09 type- operations unit for step by step 3200step/revolution

All the equipments before the SW version V08 are made with the GMD04
step by step operation unit.
From V08 SW version, all the equipments are made with the GMH09 step
by step operation unit.The operation unit GMH09 can replace the GMD04
if set to 400 step/revolution (1/4 of step).
The equipment with the operation unit GMD04 can be up dated with the
GMH09 operation unit, set to 3200 step/revolution by using the proper kit.

BEFORE REMOVING THE OPERATION UNIT FROM THE

RACK YOU SHALL MAKE SURE THAT THE LEDS ON THE
FRONT COVER ARE SWITCHED OFF.
DO NOT EXECUTE ANY SELECTIONS/ADJUSTMENTS WHEN
THE EQUIPMENT IS SWITCHED ON.

1.1.1 Fundamental settings

The fundamental settings must be executed by the Service Department

of GMM, or by qualified personnel being authorised by GMM, during
the installation or interventions of replacement, according to the kind
of motor and its application.
Wrong settings may determine failures and damages, as well as a
possible improper functioning.

Section 4.18: Transversal casette-holder - rev. 3 November 2015 page 2/10

Opera T – Adjustment Manual

a) GMD04 type - operation unit for step by step motor cod.39727

JUMPERS
Verify the following settings

DRF : CLOSED
END OF STROKE: OPENED

DIP-SWITCHES
Verify the following settings

Section 4.18: Transversal casette-holder - rev. 3 November 2015 page 3/10

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

b) GMH09 type - operation unit for step by step motor cod. 55903

c) GMH09 type - operation unit for step by step motor cod. 55903A

JUMPERS
Verify the following settings:

DRF: CLOSED
FC: OPENED
DO/UP: CLOSED on UP (ON input NPN)
12/5: CLOSED on 12 (ON working in input at12V)
Section 4.18: Transversal casette-holder - rev. 3 November 2015 page 4/10
Opera T – Adjustment Manual

The jumpers DO/UP and 12/5 must be put in one or the other possible
position. The operation unit doesn’t work in case of different jumpers
conbinations.

DIP -SWITCHES
Verify the following settings:

Standard Configuration Configuration to replace GMD04 operation unit

6,7A 6,7A
Equalizzazione Equalizzazione

¼ passo
3200 passi
400 passi

THE OPERATION UNIT DOES NOT REQUIRE ANY ADJUSTMENT

Section 4.18: Transversal casette-holder - rev. 3 November 2015 page 5/10

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1.2 Verification of the transmission movement direction

During this phase the axis movements are free and not subject to the
software control.
Pay your best attention while moving the axis in this situation!

• Verify the movement direction according to the Setup modality (Section 1 page 2).
• Switch on the equipment while the Setup modality is selected.
• Verify the correct movement direction.
• Through the opposite movement check the wirings of the motor phases.

1.2.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for verifying the direction of the cassette-holder
transmission is as follows:
• Power ON: enter the Installation while moving the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of
the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the wanted transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).

TRANSVERSAL CASSETTE-HOLDER TRANSMISSION MOVEMEMENT Code 066

• By means of P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max end of stroke) push-
buttons you can select the transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “Tilting
angle” display).

VERIFICATION OF THE MOVEMENT DIRECTION value 002

• By means of the remote keyboard, verify that by pressing the P44A (Mobile Area
leftwards) push-button the cassette-holder moves leftwards and that by pressing the P44C
(Mobile Area rightwards) push-button the cassette-holder moves rightwards.
• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 or P48 (Reset) push-button if you do not
want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

PP44A PP44C

Section 4.18: Transversal casette-holder - rev. 3 November 2015 page 6/10

Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1.3 Position of the 3Fc15 and 3Fc21 reference photocells

The equipment being switched off, you shall
• Verify that the photocell window is mechanically centered compared with the transversal
cassette-holder (ref. Fig. 1 page 6).

The equipment being switched on, you shall:

- verify the proper stop onto the photocell according to the Setup procedure (Sect.1 page 2)

1.3.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for verifying the stop of the transversal cassette-holder
onto the zero end of stroke or central end of stroke is as follows:
• Power ON: enter the Installation while moving the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of
the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the wanted transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).

TRANSVERSAL CASSETTE-HOLDER TRANSMISSION MOVEMENT code 066

• By means of P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 OR P67 (max end of stroke) push-
buttons you can select the transmission movement with stop on the end-of-stroke (this
will be visualised on the “Tilting angle” display).

END OF STROKE VERIFICATION value 001

• By means of the remote keyboard, verify that the P44A (Mobile Area leftwards) push-
button and P44C (Mobile Area rightwards) push-button command the movement of the
axis in both directions with stop onto the end of stroke.
• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 or P48 (Reset) push-button if you do not
want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

Section 4.18: Transversal casette-holder - rev. 3 November 2015 page 7/10

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1.4 Cassette-holder centering

• Select the entire size-division.
• Verify that the distance between the left side and the centre of the SFD in its parking
position is equal to 42±1mm.
• The cassette-holder being in its parking position, you shall verify that the 3Fc21
microswitch is activated (applying to the cassette centered position in parking).
• Should the result be out of the allowed tolerances, you shall execute the fine adjustment
of the cassette-holder centering according to the Setup procedure (section 1 page 2).

Fig. 1: dis. 43482 f.15+

Section 4.18: Transversal casette-holder - rev. 3 November 2015 page 8/10

Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1.5 Setup
The sequence of commands to be carried out for executing the fine adjustment of the cassette
centering is as follows:
• Verify the excursion of the cassette-holder and define the correction value to be used for
the modification.
• Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of the control panel applying to the “layer
height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the wanted transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).

TRANSVERSAL CASSETTE-HOLDER EXCURSION CORRECTION code 055

• By means of P31 OR P66 (decrease) and P32 OR P67 (increase) push-buttons you can
select the value to be modified. Each number corresponds to 0.1 mm displacement (this
value will be visualised on the “Tilting angle” display).

The default value 051 allows a cassette-holder excursion of 60±1mm from

the parking position to loading position to
If you select value 031 (20 numbers having default value = -2 mm) you
will get an excursion of the cassette-holder of 58 mm.
If you select value 071 (20 numbers having default value = +2 mm) you
will get an excursion of the cassette-holder of 62 mm.

• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 or P48(Reset) push-button if you do not
want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to quit the Installation programme.

Section 4.18: Transversal casette-holder - rev. 3 November 2015 page 9/10

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1.6 Verification of the X-ray beam

The following adjustments require X-ray emissions. You shall take
adequate precautions in order to prevent anyone and any part of your
body from being directly or indirectly exposed to X-rays.

• Before executing the radiography you shall verify the excursions according to what
specified in par. 1.4 page 8.
- Place a washer on the centre of the cassette (rif. Fig. 2 page 10).
- Position the template for the cassette centering cod. 55416 onto the diaphragms. ( Fig. 3
page 10).
• Execute a radiography with size 24x30 cm and division per 4 and verify the centering
of the cassette-holder (Fig. 4 page 10): the projection of the washer must coincide with
the hole present on the template.

Lato caricamento

Fig. 2: Posizione rondella sulla cassetta Fig. 3: Posizione dima cod.55416

Fig. 4:Risultato centratura cassetto

Section 4.18: Transversal casette-holder - rev. 3 November 2015 page 10/10

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

Section 4.19: Image Intensifier - rev. 4 November 2015

1. I.I. ................................................................................................................................................. 2
1.1 24S7 operation unit .............................................................................................................. 2
1.1.1 Fundamental settings........................................................................................................ 2
1.2 Verification of the transmission movement direction .......................................................... 6
1.2.1 Setup................................................................................................................................. 6
1.3 Position of the 3Fc19-3Fc20 microswitches ....................................................................... 7
1.3.1 Setup................................................................................................................................. 8

Notes:

The I.I. transmission movement is an optional for the O-T20c model.

The following adjustments are valid only if code 057 value 001 (I.I. in
fluoroscopy position at the switching on of the equipment) is selected.
(Please make reference to Section 3 – Chapter 1.10).

Section 4.19: Image Intensifier - rev. 4 November 2015 – page 1/8

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1. I.I.

The presence of the I.I. elevation transmission depends on the type of SFD
installed.

1.1 24S7 operation unit

GMD04 type – operation unit for step-by-step motors 400step/revolution
GMH09 type- operations unit for step by step 3200step/revolution

The operations unit 24S7 is shared with the I.I. movement – Section 4.19
(rif. Dis. 55169 f.15+)

All the equipments before the SW version V08 are made with the GMD04 step by
step operation unit.
From V08 SW version, all the equipments are made with the GMH09 step by step
operation unit.The operation unit GMH09 can replace the GMD04 if set to 400
step/revolution (1/4 of step).
The equipment with the operation unit GMD04 can be up dated with the GMH09
operation unit, set to 3200 step/revolution by using the proper kit.

BEFORE REMOVING THE OPERATION UNIT FROM THE RACK,

PLEASE MAKE SURE THAT ALL THE LEDS ON THE FRONT SIDE
ARE SWITCHED OFF. DO NOT EXECUTE ANY SETTINGS WHEN
THE EQUIPMENT IS SWITCHED ON.

1.1.1 Fundamental settings

The fundamental settings must be executed by qualified personnel at

the installation or when a replacement is going to be executed relating
to the kind of motor in use and its application.
Wrong settings may cause failures and damages, as well as a possible
bad functioning.

Section 4.19: Image Intensifier - rev. 4 November 2015 - pag. 2/8

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

a) GMD04 type - operation unit for step by step motor cod. 39727

JUMPERS
Verify the following settings

DRF : CLOSED
END OF STROKE: OPENED

DIP-SWITCHES
Verify the following settings

Section 4.19: Image Intensifier - rev. 4 November 2015 – page 3/8

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

b) GMH09 type - operation unit for step by step motor cod.55903

c) GMH09 type - operation unit for step by step motor cod.55903A.

JUMPERS
Verify the following settings:

DRF: CLOSED
FC: OPENED
DO/UP: CLOSED on UP (ON input NPN)
12/5: CLOSED on 12 (ON working in input at12V)

Section 4.19: Image Intensifier - rev. 4 November 2015 - pag. 4/8

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

The jumpers DO/UP and 12/5 must be put in one or the other possible
position. The operation unit doesn’t work in case of different jumpers
conbinations.

DIP -SWITCHES
Verify the following settings:

Standard Configuration Configuration to change GMD04 operation unit

6,7A 6,7A
Equalizzazione Equalizzazione

¼ passo
3200 passi
400 passi

BOTH THE OPERATION UNIT DO NOT REQUIRE ANY ADJUSTMENT

Section 4.19: Image Intensifier - rev. 4 November 2015 – page 5/8

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1.2 Verification of the transmission movement direction

During this phase the axis movements are free and not subject to the
software control.
Pay your best attention while moving the axis in this situation!

• Verify the movement direction according to the Setup modality (Section 1 page 2).
• Switch on the equipment while the Setup modality is selected.
• Verify the correct movement direction.
• Through the opposite movement check the wirings of the motor phases (drawing 55169
f.15+).

1.2.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for verifying the direction of the I.I. transmission is as
follows:
• Power ON: enter the Installation while moving the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of
the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the wanted transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).
I.I. TRANSMISSION MOVEMENT code 065
• By means of P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 or P67 (max end of stroke) push-
buttons you can select the transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “Tilting
angle” display).
VERIFICATION OF THE TRANSMISSION MOVEMENT value 002
• By means of the remote keyboard, verify that by pressing the P44D (outwards transversal
tabletop) push-button the I.I. moves downwards (descent movement) and that by pressing
the P44B (inwards transversal tabletop) push-button the I.I. moves upwards (ascent
movement)
• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 or P48 (Reset) push-button if you do not
want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

PP44B

PP44D

Section 4.19: Image Intensifier - rev. 4 November 2015 - pag. 6/8

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1.3 Position of the 3Fc19-3Fc20 microswitches

Fig. 1: dis. 43482 f.16-

The equipment being switched off, you shall:

• Verify the proper stop onto the microswitches according to the Setup procedure (Sect.1
page 2).

Section 4.19: Image Intensifier - rev. 4 November 2015 – page 7/8

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1.3.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for verifying the stop of the I.I. onto the end of stroke is
as follows:
• Power ON: enter the Installation while moving the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of
the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the wanted transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).

I.I. TRANSMISSION MOVEMENT code 065

• By means of P31 OR P66 (min end of stroke) and P32 or P67 (max end of stroke) push-
buttons you can select the transmission movement with stop on the end-of-stroke (this
will be visualised on the “Tilting angle” display).

END OF STROKE VERIFICATION value 001

• By means of the remote keyboard, verify that the P44D (outwards transversal tabletop)
push-button and P44B (inwards transversal tabletop) push-button command the
movement of the axis in both directions with stop onto the end of stroke.
• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 OR P48(Reset) push-button if you do
not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.
• Set the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation programme.

Section 4.19: Image Intensifier - rev. 4 November 2015 - pag. 8/8

 Opera T - Adjustment Manual

Section 4.20: Tube centering - rev. 2 January 2004

1. Tube centering (hand-grip tube centering-first type)...................................................................2

2. Tube centering (hand grip tube centering- second type)..............................................................4

Notes:

Section 4.20: Tube centering - rev. 2 January 2004 - pag.e 1/6

Opera T - Adjustment Manual

1. Tube centering (hand-grip tube centering-first type)

• Move the stand onto the centered position.
• Move the stand and SFD onto the centered position compared with the table.
• Move the table to the horizontal position.
• By means of a spirit level, verify the table is perfectly horizontal.
• By means of a spirit level, verify the X-ray tube is perfectly horizontal.
• Verify the existence of the proper correspondence between the microswitch of the tube
centering and the relevand led 25S3-Lv10:
Tube centered: led 25S3-Lv10 switched off.
Tube rotated: led 25S3-Lv10 switched on.
• Should the tube result not centered you shall:
• Unloose the socket-head screws M5x10 (A/Fig. 1-Fig. 2).
• Adjust the dowels 4x20 (B/Fig. 1-Fig. 2) so as to obtain the tube proper position.
• Verify the proper correspondence between the microswitch and the led 25S3-Lv10.
In case such a correspondence is not obtained, you shall
Remove the covers of the tube support.
Unloose the socket-head screw M5x20 (A/fig.3) and turn the ring B/fig.3 until the 3Fc13
microswitch result to be free.
Tight the TCEI M5x20 (A/fig.3) socket-head screw that was previously unloosen.
Restore the covers in their original position.

B
A

Fig. 1 : Tube centering adjustment

(first hand-grip type)

Section 4.20: Tube centering - rev. 2 January 2004 - page 2/6

 Opera T - Adjustment Manual

A B

Fig. 2 : Tube centering adjustment

Fig. 3 : Posizione micro 3Fc 13

Section 4.20: Tube centering - rev. 2 January 2004 - pag.e 3/6

Opera T - Adjustment Manual

2. Tube centering (hand grip tube centering- second type)

• Move the stand onto the centered position.
• Move the stand and SFD onto the centered position compared with the table.
• Move the table to the horizontal position.
• By means of a spirit level, verify the table is perfectly horizontal.
• By means of a spirit level, verify the X-ray tube is perfectly horizontal.
• Verify the existence of the proper correspondence between the microswitch of the tube
centering and the relevand led 25S3-Lv10:
Tube centered: led 25S3-Lv10 switched off.
Tube rotated: led 25S3-Lv10 switched on.
• Should the tube result not centered you shall:
• Adjust the 4 dowels M8x16 (A/Fig.4/Fig.5) so as to obtain the tube proper position.
• Verify the proper correspondence between the microswitch and the led 25S3-Lv10.
In case such a correspondence is not obtained, you shall
Remove the covers of the tube support.
Unloose the socket-head screw M5x20 (A/fig.6) and turn the ring B/fig.6 until the 3Fc13
microswitch result to be free.
Tight the TCEI M5x20 (A/Fig.6) socket-head screw that was previously unloosen.
Restore the covers in their original position

Fig. 4: Tube centering adjustment (2 Type)

Section 4.20: Tube centering - rev. 2 January 2004 - page 4/6

 Opera T - Adjustment Manual

Fig.5: Tube centering adjustment (2 Type)

Fig.6:Posizionemicro3Fc13

Section 4.20: Tube centering - rev. 2 January 2004 - pag.e 5/6

Opera T - Adjustment Manual

Blank page

Section 4.20: Tube centering - rev. 2 January 2004 - page 6/6

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

Section 4.21: Block from the suspension accessory - ver. 0 March, 1998

1. Block from the suspension accessory ..........................................................................................2

Notes:

Section 4.21: Block from the suspension accessory - ver. 0 March, 1998 - pag.e 1/2
 Opera T - Adjustment Manual

1. Block from the suspension accessory

It is the installer’s responsibility to provide the microswitch for the

block from the suspension accessory.

• Verify the existence of the proper correspondence between the microswitch of the block
from the suspension and the relevant led 25S3-Lv3.
• Suspension in parking position jumper present on 25S3-Sc21.8,9:
25S3-Lv3 switched on and no movement is blocked.
• Suspension not in parking position and jumper not present 25S3.Sc2-8,9:
led 25S3-Lv3 switched off and the following movements blocked: Tilting,
Elevation, Mobile Area, Stand movements (Centering, Angle) and Tomography.

Section 4.21: Block from the suspension accessory - ver. 0 March, 1998 - pag. 2/2
 Opera T - Adjustment Manual

Section 4.22: Adjustment of the visualisation display on the stand - rev. 1 June, 2007

1. Adjustment of the visualisation display on the stand...................................................................2

1.1 Setup ....................................................................................................................................3

Notes:

Section 4.22: Adjustment of the visualisation display on the stand - rev. 1 June, 2007 - pag.e 1/4
 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1. Adjustment of the visualisation display on the stand

The display placed on the stand visualises the following data: tilting angle, incidence angle of the
stand (or the tomo angle in tomography modality).
Execute the following operations in order to adjust the display:
• Move the table to the horizontal position.
• Command an angle of the stand rightwards or leftwards until the back cover of the
compressor is set completely free.
• Remove the back cover of the compressor.
• Enter the Installation modality (25S3-Sw1.1: ON).

Topographic
board

• Select code 073 value 001 in order for the display to visualise ‘00°’.
• Adjust the 3S2-P1 potentiometer so as to read the value ‘00’ on the stand display
• Adjust the 3S2-P3 potentiometer so as to read the value ‘00’ on the tilting display.
• Select code 073 value 002 in order to visualise the value ’90°’.
• Adjust the 3S2-P2 potentiometer so as to read the value ‘90’ on the stand display.
• Adjust the 3S2-P4 potentiometer so as to read the value ‘90’ on the tilting display.

These two adjustments affect each other: it is necessary to repeat them

several times until the adjustment results to be correct.

• Leave the Setup modality.

• Verify the existence of the proper correspondence in the visualisations between the control panel
displays and the stand displays.
• Should not the proper correspondence result, you shall repeat the adjustment.

Section 4.22: Adjustment of the visualisation display on the stand - rev. 1 June, 2007 - pag. 2/4
 Opera T - Adjustment Manual

1.1 Setup
The sequence of commands to be executed for realising the adjustment of the visualisation displays
showing the tilting angles and the incidence angles is as follows:
• Power ON: enter the Installation while moving the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the display of
the control panel applying to the “layer height and tilting angle” will visualise 000).
• By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons, you shall select the
code for the wanted transmission movement (this will be visualised on the “layer height”
display).

DISPLAY VISUALISATION ADJUSTMENT code 073

• By means of P31 OR P66 (decrease) and P32 or P67(increase) push-buttons you can
select the code setting the voltage on the DACs necessary to ensure the visualisation of
the values 00° and 90° on the stand display (this will be visualised on the “Tilting
angle” display).

VISUALISATION OF 00 ON THE DISPLAY value 001

VISUALISATION OF 90 ON THE DISPLAY value 002

• Press P33 (enter) push-button to confirm or P57 OR P48(Reset) push-button if you do

not want to.
• The value visualised on the “tilting angle” display will set to the original value 000 in
both cases.

Section 4.22: Adjustment of the visualisation display on the stand - rev. 1 June, 2007 - pag.e 3/4
 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

Blank page

Section 4.22: Adjustment of the visualisation display on the stand - rev. 1 June, 2007 - pag. 4/4
 Opera T - Adjustmenet manual

Sezione 4.23: Focal distance adjustment and compensation - rev.0 November 2004

1. Focal distance adjustment and compensation (SID compensation).............................................2

Note:

Sezione 4.23: Focal distance adjustment and compensation - rev.0 November 2004 - page.1/2
 Opera T - Adjustmenet manual

1. Focal distance adjustment and compensation (SID compensation)

The focal distance compensation is an optional function and works only with
O-Gxxx generator (Indico 100) integrated for GE cod. 058 value 006

• On the generator must be present the hardware key that allow the SID function
compensation.
• Enable the “SID compensation” function by the Genware program
• Switch OFF the equipment
• Connect the digital multimeter between :

Vcc probe: 25S1-TP1.12 -VAN12-

OV probe: 25S1-TP1.13/14 -0V15-

• Switch ON the equipment

• Move the focal equipment to 115centimeters distance, and note the VAN12 value in
order to type the value in the “SID Min Ref” box with the 0,5VDC = 50 format
• Move the focal equipment to the distance of 150centimeters, note the VAN12 value and
type the value in the “SID Max Ref” box with the 5,5VDC = 550 format
• Check if in the “SID Int Type” box is typed the 1 value

550

• Log off from Genware programme and check the SID compensation functioning during
normal equipment works

Sezione 4.23: Focal distance adjustment and compensation - rev.0 November 2004 - pag. 2/2
 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

Section 5: Control board configuration - rev 7 November 2015

1. Control boards configuration ....................................................................................................... 2

1.1 25S1 Jumper configuration (Host CPU): ............................................................................. 2
1.1.1 Configuration CPU-Host cod.55361 ............................................................................ 2
1.1.2 CPU –Host board configuration cod. 55973 ................................................................ 2
1.2 Configuration Jumper 25S2 (Assi board) ............................................................................ 3
1.2.1 Assi board configuration cod.55172 ............................................................................ 3
1.2.2 Assi board configuration cod. 55974 ........................................................................... 3
1.3 25S3-Sw2 Dip-switches (I/O board) ................................................................................... 4
1.4 25S3-Sw1 dip-switches (I/O board) ..................................................................................... 5
1.5 25S3-jumper for board configuration (I/O board) ............................................................... 6
1.6 25S4-jumper configuration (injector interface board) ......................................................... 6
1.7 Parameters visualisation on console display 1S3 ................................................................. 7
1.7.1 Pulsed/Attention visualisation on the console Display ................................................ 7

Notes:
Added new directions for new CPU and Assi board
Added instructions for injector interface board
Added instructions for the console parameters display board

Section 5: Control board configuration - rev 7 November 2015 – page 1/8

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1. Control boards configuration

This selection is executed at the manufacturing plants and must not be

modified for any reason. Should it be necessary to replace a board, you
shall check that the position of the configuration jumper is correct.
The following boards are adjusted in manufacture and they don’t need
other adjustments. Changing boards adjustments cause equipment
malfunctioning.
1.1 25S1 Jumper configuration (Host CPU):

1.1.1 Configuration CPU-Host cod.55361

Please make reference to the topographic drawing code 55361C f.1/11 for the jumper position.

Jumper Position
J1 ON
J2 OFF
J3 ON
J4 ON
J5 ON
J6 ON
J7 ON
J8 ON
J9 ON
J10 ON
J11 ON
J12 ON

1.1.2 CPU –Host board configuration cod. 55973

Jumper Position Description

J1 OFF Serial 2- 9 pin connection
J2 ON Serial 2 - Fibre optic

Section 5: Control board configuration - rev 7 November 2015 - page 2/8

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1.2 Configuration Jumper 25S2 (Assi board)

1.2.1 Assi board configuration cod.55172

Please make reference to the topographic drawing code 55172-f.2/2 for the jumper position.

Jumper Position
J1 ON
J2 OFF
J3 ON

1.2.2 Assi board configuration cod. 55974

There aren’t jumpers that need to be set in this Assi board

Section 5: Control board configuration - rev 7 November 2015 – page 3/8

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1.3 25S3-Sw2 Dip-switches (I/O board)

This selection is executed at the manufacturing plants according to the

equipment configuration. Should it be necessary to replace the board,
you shall repeat the same configuration. If it is necessary to modify the
equipment configuration, you shall properly set the switches according
to the following instructions.

The 25S3-Sw2 dip-switch is used to short-circuit the analogical input

should not the relevant transmission be present. Do not execute any
adjustments of potentiometers or acquisitions of end-of-strokes with
reference potentiometer present and dip-switch being ON.
Make reference to the topographic drawing code 55308f.1 for the
jumpers positions.

Elevation potentiometer:
SWITCH-2 PRESENT NOT PRESENT
Sw2 - 1 OFF ON

Motorized filter potentiometer:

SWITCH-2 PRESENT NOT PRESENT
Sw2 - 2 OFF ON

Longitudinal tabletop potentiometer:

SWITCH-2 PRESENT NOT PRESENT
Sw2 - 3 OFF ON

Iris potentiometer:
SWITCH-2 PRESENT NOT PRESENT
Sw2 – 4 OFF ON

Jaws potentiometers:
SWITCH-2 PRESENT NOT PRESENT
Sw2 - 5 OFF ON
Sw2 - 6 OFF ON

ADC13 and ADC14 not used:

SWITCH-2 PRESENT NOT PRESENT
Sw2 - 7 OFF ON
Sw2 - 8 OFF ON

Section 5: Control board configuration - rev 7 November 2015 - page 4/8

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1.4 25S3-Sw1 dip-switches (I/O board)

Functioning modality:
SWITCH-1 NORMALE SETUP
Sw1 - 1 OFF ON

Normal use or use in the Setup phase.

Allarmax device intervention:

SWITCH-1 PRESENT NOT RPESENT
Sw1 - 2 OFF ON

The Allarmax device ensures the functioning of the equipment without the
error control by the software.
This must be used only if really needed and necessary.

ASSI board:
SWITCH-1 PRESENT NOT PRESENT
Sw1 - 3 OFF ON

In case of bad functioning of the ASSI board, the equipment can work but
the Focal Distance movement and all the movements linked with the SFD
will be blocked.

Low ceiling safety:

SWITCH-1 PRESENT NOT PRESENT
Sw1 - 4 OFF ON

When the “Low ceiling safety” accessory is present, the 25S3-Sw1.4 must
be set onto the OFF position

Section 5: Control board configuration - rev 7 November 2015 – page 5/8

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1.5 25S3-jumper for board configuration (I/O board)

Focal distance compensation

JUMPER PRESENT NOT PRESENT

JW1 ON OFF
JW2 ON OFF

25S4 Board (injector interface)

JUMPER PRESENT NOT PRESENT

JW3 OFF ON

A signal for cassette in

JUMPER STATE DESCRIPTION

JW4 ON Wallstand combined with table and ceiling
suspension for manual collimation
OFF Wallstand combined with ceiling suspension with
automatic collimation

1.6 25S4-jumper configuration (injector interface board)

Injectors interface

JUMPER STATE DESCIPTION

JW1 OFF n.u..
JW2 OFF n.u.
JW3 OFF Signal injectors named ILLUMINA and
ANGIOMAT inhibited
ON Hand switch injector named MEDRAD disabled
JW4 OFF n.u.

Whit 25S4 board you must cut the JW 3 on board 25S3

Section 5: Control board configuration - rev 7 November 2015 - page 6/8

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1.7 Parameters visualisation on console display 1S3

1.7.1 Pulsed/Attention visualisation on the console Display

The console display for the visualisation of the pulsed fluoroscopy, when it is not used for this
reason, it is used to signal the equipment movement limitation If the pulsed fluoroscopy is not
present (code59 value 02) the display signals the movement limitation (lightening display). If
pulsed fluoroscopy is present (code 59 value 01), the display signals the frequency or review images
selected and the equipment movement limitation only when it happens (lightening display).

Valid for cod.55186 and cod. 56080 boards

The R11 resistance elimination from the 1S3 board (Parameters visualisation
on the console display), allowed to see the “A” letter (Attention) on the
pulsed fluoroscopy console display when the equipment being in movement is
limited (for instance by the ceiling, floor, walls, etc .).
This is a sort of flash visualisation that appears any time is selected one
operation unit movement that is not allowed to do, due to some limitations. If
is not eliminated the R11 resistance, instead of seeing the letter “A” , you will
see visualised on the console display the number “8”.
This console display visualisation is possible since the “V08” version.
To Avoid the R11 resistance is not possible with pulsed fluoroscopy
activated, code 59 value 001

Section 5: Control board configuration - rev 7 November 2015 – page 7/8

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

Valid for cod. 56080A board

The insertion of the J5 jumper on the 1S3 board (Parameters visualisation on

the console display), allows to see the “A” letter (Attention) on the pulsed
fluoroscopy console display when the equipment being in movement is limited
(for instance by the ceiling, floor, walls, etc .).
This is a sort of flash visualisation that appears any time is selected one
operation unit movement that is not allowed to do, due to some limitations.
If the J5 jumper is not inserted, instead of seeing the letter “A” , you will see
visualised on the console display the number “8”.
This console display visualisation is possible since the “V08” version.
The insertion of the J5 jumper is not possible with pulsed fluoroscopy
activated, code 59 value 001

Section 5: Control board configuration - rev 7 November 2015 - page 8/8

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

Section 6: Software management - rev. 3 January , 2004

1. Software management..................................................................................................................2
1.1 25S1 firmware loading.........................................................................................................4
1.1.1 Firmware on CPU-Host board cod.55361...................................................................................... 4
1.1.2 Firmware on CPU-Host board cod.55973...................................................................................... 4
1.2 25S2 firmware loading.........................................................................................................5
1.2.1 Firmware on ASSI board cod.55172............................................................................................... 5
1.2.2 Firmware on ASSI board cod.55974............................................................................................... 5
1.3 1S2 software loading............................................................................................................6
1.4 Checksum and 25S1 board software version check............................................................6
1.5 1S2 checksum control ..........................................................................................................7
1.6 Allarms reset ........................................................................................................................7
1.7 Data modification.................................................................................................................8
1.8 Microprocessor board testing...............................................................................................8
1.8.1 Material needed for executing the boards testing........................................................................... 8

Notes:

Section 6: Software management - rev. 3 January , 2004 page 1/8

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1. Software management
The software controlling the Opera Table series consists of three different parts: the HOST CPU
(25S1) software, the ASSI board (25S2) software and the Control Panel CPU (1S2) software.
The Host CPU software and the Assi board software are loaded on Eprom (25S1-Eprom1/Eprom2
and 25S2-Eprom1/Eprom2 respectively), or on a Flash Eprom (25S2-xx and 25S2-xx respectively).
The firmware type depends on CPU-ASSI assembled equipment
A replacement of the software of the 25S1 e 25S2 boards determines a subsequent necessary
replacement of the relevant Eproms, while as far as the Control Panel CPU software is concerned, it
is sufficient to update the content of the Flash Eprom with no needs to replace it.
The CPU software is loaded on a Flash Eprom (1S2-XX):
In case of console CPU software replacement it is possible to update the Flash Eprom content
without substitute it.
A programme, integrated into the software managing the OPERA series, is available for the
technician allowing to execute a more deepen analysis of the control boards and a verification of the
checksums of the Eproms, thus the software efficiency.
In order to execute this test programme, it is sufficient to have at your disposal a PC with MS
Windows 951 2 operating system (or superior) and having installed the “GMM
terminal”(teleservice) software.
“GMM terminal”(teleservice) software programme exchange data with the managing software
OPERA by a direct serial connection
Connect the cable between CPU-Host- and 25S1-Cn3 (Serial RS232-C) connector..
and to the serial input of the PC to be used.
Connection to a CPU-Host cod.55361:
The cable code 52360 is a simple cable with following connections:
3 - TXD

2 - RXD 1 - RXD
Connettore
Connettore AMP
9 poli 2 - TXD
4 poli - femmina
seriale PC
4 - GND seriale CPU - 25S1
Connector
AMP connector
9 poles
5 - GND 4 poles- female
Serial PC
Serial CPU– 25S1
Connection to a CPU-Host cod.55973:
The cable code 52640 is a simple PC serial cable with following connections:

2 - RXD 2 - RXD
Connettore
9 poli 3 - TXD Connettore Sub D
3 - TXD
seriale PC 9 poli - Femmina
Connector seriale CPU - 25S1
9 poles Sub D connector
Serial PC 5 - GND 5 - GND 9 poles – Female
Serial CPU – 25S1

1
MS Windows is a registered mark.
2
Please make reference to the relevant user's manuals for further information on Windows programs.
Section 6: Software management - rev. 3 January , 2004 page 2/8
 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

Further information about “GMM Terminal” (teleservice) programme,

make reference to the OPERA T “Teleservice” manual

Check the compatibility between the equipment software version and the
teleservice software version before using it
For further information get in touch with GMM

Section 6: Software management - rev. 3 January , 2004 page 3/8

Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1.1 25S1 firmware loading

In order to execute the inspection or the replacement of the OPERA table firmware (25S1 board –
Host CPU), it is necessary to carry out the following procedure

YOU SHALL TAKE PROPER PRECAUTIONS WHILE HANDLING THE

ELECTRONIC BOARDS.

1.1.1 Firmware on CPU-Host board cod.55361

The CPU-Host board set two Eproms.
The equipment being switched off:
• Open the power cabinet.
• Open the I/O board support (there are two nuts fixing the support).
• Disconnect the 25S2-Cn1,Cn2 connectors.
• Remove the four screws (or threaded turrets) fixing the 25S2 board.
• Remove the 25S2 from its housing.
• Replace Eprom 25S1-Eprom1, Eprom2.
• Repeat the above-specified phases in the opposite sequence.
• Switch on the equipment and verify the checksum according to the 1.4 procedure.

1.1.2 Firmware on CPU-Host board cod.55973

The CPU-Host board set a Flash Eprom instead of usual Eproms.
The difference between the two components is that the Flash Eprom can be deleted and re
programmed in its place, in other words, without taking it out from its board.

Equipment being switched off:

• Open the power cabinet.
• Open the I/O board support (there are two nuts fixing the support)
• Connect the serial input cable cod. 52640 to 25S1-CN18 (CPU-Host board).
• Move jumper 25S1-J2 on 25S1-J1 (J1-ON, J2-OFF)
• With the PC off, connect the cable to the PC serial input
• Switch on the PC.

Equipment being switched on:

• By the Teleservice (version 2.0) programme, select the Flash CPU-Host (make reference
to Teleservice manual ).
• After having done the programming switch off the PC.

Equipment being switched off:

• Disconnect the cable from the serial output and restore the jumper.
• Repeat the previous procedure in a opposite sequence
• Switch on the equipment and check the checksum and the software version by following
the procedure 1.4.

Section 6: Software management - rev. 3 January , 2004 page 4/8

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1.2 25S2 firmware loading

In order to execute the inspection or the replacement of the OPERA table firmware (25S2 ASSI
board ), it is necessary to carry out the following procedure

YOU SHALL TAKE PROPER PRECAUTIONS WHILE HANDLING THE

ELECTRONIC BOARDS.

1.2.1 Firmware on ASSI board cod.55172

The ASSI board set two different Eproms

Equipment being switched off

• Open the power cabinet.
• Open the I/O board support (there are two nuts fixing the support)
• Raplace the Eprom 25S2-Eprom1, Eprom2
• Repeat the above-specified phases in opposite sequence

1.2.2 Firmware on ASSI board cod.55974

The ASSI board set a Flash Eprom instead of usual Eproms.
The difference between the two components is that the Flash Eprom can be deleted and re
programmed in its place.

The programming of this board is done by GMM, if it is necessary to programme the board in the
place where it is installed, further instruction must be sent.

Section 6: Software management - rev. 3 January , 2004 page 5/8

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1.3 1S2 software loading

The CPU Console board set a Flash Eprom instead of usual Eproms.
The difference between the two components is that the Flash Eprom can be deleted and re
programmed in its place, in other words, without taking it out.

In order to execute the inspection or the replacement of the OPERA table firmware, it is necessary
to carry out the following procedure

YOU SHALL TAKE PROPER PRECAUTIONS WHILE HANDLING THE

ELECTRONIC BOARDS.

Equipment being switched off:

• Remove the right and left console cover
• Remove the two nuts fixing the up panel
• Open the console panel.
• Connect the cable for parallel port cod. 55394 a 1S2-CN9.
• Remove the fibre optic cable3.
• PC being switched off, connect the cable to the PC parallel port
• Switch on the PC.

Equipment being switched on:

• Check if on the display alarms/visualization, appears the code 098.
• By Teleservice programme (version 2.0), select the flash CPU-KEYBOARD programme
(make reference to the Teleservice manual).
• Switch off the PC.

Equipment being switched off:

• Disconnect the parallel port cable and re-connect the optic fibre cable in proper
connectors
• Assemble the console
• Switch on the equipment and check the chek sum and the software version following 1.5
procedure.

1.4 Checksum and 25S1 board software version check

To check the software version installed on 25S1 board, Eprom checksum or Flash Eprom, do
connect to teleservice modality.

To use teleservice modality, make reference to Opera T “Teleservice Manual”.

3
In case the optic fibers are fixed by plastic strap, remove the power connector 1S2-Cn6, switch on the equipment and replace the 1S2-Cn6
connector.
Section 6: Software management - rev. 3 January , 2004 page 6/8
 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1.5 1S2 checksum control

To check the software version installed on 1S2 board and Eprom checksum or Flash Eprom, do
conect to Teleservice modality.

To use Teleservice modality make reference to Opera T “Teleservice Manual”.

1.6 Allarms reset

The software controlling the OPERA memorises possible errors occurred during the life cycle of
the equipment during its normal functioning; this memory stores the date, hour and number of alarm
that intervened. It is suggested to keep these data memorised in order to have at your disposal the
passed conditions of the equipment, though it may happen that such alarms must be reset.

The alarms are set in the RAM battery

When the SW version is changed can be necessary to reset the alarms. For CPU-Host
board cod. 55361, when alarms are not memorised, check the battery voltage assembled on
the 25S1(CPU) board. Lithium Battery of 3V. (Cn10-1.2 (Vcc) – Cn10-3,4 (Gnd) For CPU
Host cod. 55973, in case of battery problem, the keyboard alarms/visualisation display will
visualise the code 096.
In case you need to replace the battery, change it with one of the same type

For alarms reset do connect to Teleservice modality

To use Teleservice modality makes reference to Opera T “Teleservice Manual”.

Section 6: Software management - rev. 3 January , 2004 page 7/8

Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1.7 Data modification

The software controlling the OPERA memorises possible errors occurred during the life cycle of the
equipment during its normal functioning; this memory stores the date, hour and the alarm number
intervened. Date and hour are memorised as gg/mm/aa:hh/mm/ss format.
The date/hour function does not take into consideration the legal hour. To refer to legal hour it is
necessary to change by hand date and hour
As soon as the CPU-Host substitution procedure is started or the battery changing is started check
the date/hour update.
To change date and hour please do connect to Teleservice modality:

To use Teleservice modality make reference to Opera T

“Teleservice Manual”

1.8 Microprocessor board testing

For further information about OPERA test programme, make reference

to “Teleservice manual”

1.8.1 Material needed for executing the boards testing

Beside a PC, the following material is needed

Quantity Code Description

1 52360 Cable serial connection between PC and CPU-Host cod.55361
1 52640 Cable serial connection between PC and CPU-Host cod.55973
1 52403 50 outlet flat cable lg.300mm for the 25S3-Cn3,Cn8 connection
1 07392 40 outlet flat-cable lg.300mm for connection

For the 25S1-Cn7,Cn5, 25S1-Cn6 andCn4 connection, use two flat-cables of 34 outlet, already
available for the connection with the 25S3 board.

Section 6: Software management - rev. 3 January , 2004 page 8/8

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

Section 7: Belts and Chains adjustment - rev. 0 June, 2000

1. Specifications for adjusting chains and belts ...............................................................................2

2. Tilting transmission......................................................................................................................2
2.1. OT20s - OT20c ................................................................................................................2
2.2. O-T90s .............................................................................................................................3
2.3. OT90-e .............................................................................................................................4
3. Elevation group transmission.......................................................................................................5
4. Spot film device transmission ..................................................................................................6
5. Stand transmission ...................................................................................................................6
6. Compressor trolley transmission..............................................................................................7
7. Longitudinal tabletop transmission..........................................................................................8
8. Spot film device transmissions ................................................................................................9
8.1 Grid support-trolley - Parallel diaphragms / Crossed diaphragms.......................................9
8.2 Cassette-holder.........................................................................................................................10

Notes:

Confidential information reserved to qualified

personnel only!

Section 7: Belts and Chains adjustment - rev. 0 June, 2000 - page.1/10

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

1. Specifications for adjusting chains and belts

2. Tilting transmission

1. Check the alignment of the pulleys and the parallelism between the
shafts.
2. After some hours of normal functioning, verify the tenseness of the
chain and increase it if necessary.
3. You shall never use any product for increasing the adherence or grid and
make sure that any contact with oils is avoided.

2.1. OT20s - OT20c

• Remove the cover of the tilting transmission.
• The following values must be measured in order to realise the proper tenseness of the chain:
Applied strength (F) = 2daN arrow (f) = 5mm for OT20s
Applied strength (F) = 2daN arrow (f) = 3mm for OT20c
• For ensuring a proper operation you shall execute the pre-tension of the chain according to the
following scheme:

Section 7: Belts and Chains adjustment - rev. 0 June, 2000 - page. 2/10
 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

2.2. O-T90s – OT30/90c

• Remove the cover of the tilting transmission.
• The following values must be measured in order to realise the proper tenseness of the chain:
Applied strength (F) = 2daN arrow (f) = 6mm
• For ensuring a proper operation you shall execute the pre-tension of the chain according to the
following scheme:

Section 7: Belts and Chains adjustment - rev. 0 June, 2000 - page.3/10

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

2.3.OT90-ce
• Remove the cover of the tilting transmission.
• The following values must be measured in order to realise the proper tenseness of the chain:
Applied strength (F) = 2daN arrow (f) = 3mm
• For ensuring a proper operation you shall execute the pre-tension of the chain according to the
following scheme:

Section 7: Belts and Chains adjustment - rev. 0 June, 2000 - page. 4/10
 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

3. Elevation group transmission

Chain p.12.7
• Move the table to the horizontal position and the “Stand-SFD” group centered on the central
point of the table
• Adjust the tenseness of the chain so as to get the following values:
Applied strength (F) = 5daN arrow (f) = 5mm

Section 7: Belts and Chains adjustment - rev. 0 June, 2000 - page.5/10

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

4. Spot film device transmission

Chain p.12.7
• Move the table to the horizontal position.
• Adjust the tenseness of the chain by screwing the ring nut (A) of the chain’s tie rod up to obtain
the value of 8.5mm between the ring nut (A) and the chain connection.

5. Stand transmission
Chain p.12.7
• The equipment being in the horizontal position, you shall unloose of half a turn the screws
fixing the two tie-rods of the chain.
• Place the right ring-nut and the left ring-nut (A) near the springs so as to tight them without pre-
charging them.
• Tight the right ring-nut and the left ring-nut (A) of 2mm each in order to obtain a 100daN
tenseness of the chain.
• Block the two screws of each tie rod with a 2.5 daNm torque.

Section 7: Belts and Chains adjustment - rev. 0 June, 2000 - page. 6/10
 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

6. Compressor trolley transmission

Chain p.6
• Move the compressor support-trolley to its parking position.
• Adjust the chain so as to obtain the following tenseness value:
Applied strength (F) = 1daN arrow = 10mm

Section 7: Belts and Chains adjustment - rev. 0 June, 2000 - page.7/10

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

7. Longitudinal tabletop transmission

Chain p.9,52
• Move the tabletop onto the centered position.
• Adjust the chain of the first transmission so as to measure the following tenseness values:
Applied strength (F) = 5daN arrow = 9mm

After executing the tenseness adjustment of the first transmission, you shall execute the adjustment
applying to the second transmission as follows:
• By operating on the relevant screw, place the chain connections near the aluminium guide of the
tabletop, making sure not to block them.
• Tight the screw (A) so as to obtain a tightening torque of 0.3daN.
• Fix the two M5 screws of the chain connection with a tightening torque of 0.5daN.

The procedure for executing the tenseness adjustment of the longitudinal

tabletop chain is the same for both the transmission placed onto the head-
side and the transmission placed onto the feet-side.

Section 7: Belts and Chains adjustment - rev. 0 June, 2000 - page. 8/10
 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

8. Spot film device transmissions

8.1 Grid support-trolley - Parallel diaphragms / Crossed diaphragms

Chain p.6
• Move the equipment to the horizontal position.
• Adjust the chain so as to obtain the following tenseness value:
Applied strength (F) = 1daN arrow (f) = 15mm

Section 7: Belts and Chains adjustment - rev. 0 June, 2000 - page.9/10

 Opera T – Adjustment Manual

8.2 Cassette-holder
Move the cassette holder to its parking position.
Adjust the chain so as to obtrain the following tenseness values:
First transmission (chain p.6):
Applied strength (F) = 3daN arrow (f) = 6mm

Second transmission (chain p.8):

Applied strength (F) = 1,5daN arrow (f) = 1mm

Section 7: Belts and Chains adjustment - rev. 0 June, 2000 - page. 10/10